W220 S-Class Encyclopedia - User contributions [en]

Index

2026-05-02T08:51:18Z

Pokseva: /* WIS 47 Fuel System */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Mercedes-Benz S-Class W220 Wiki Encyclopedia}}

<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>

=='''START HERE''' at the List of Key Words With Links to Relevant Sections==
[[Key Words with Links to Relevant Sections]]

==W220 Wiki Purpose and Guidelines==
[[W220 Encyclopedia:About]]

==Template for W220 Wiki Articles (Copy and Paste to start a new article)==
[[Template for W220 Wiki Articles]]

==WIS 00 Overall Vehicle General Information==
* [[Acronyms and Abbreviations]]
* [[Components | Component numbers and locations]]
* [[BRABUS]]
* [[Buying Guide]]
* Changes between previous S-Class models
* [[Facelift | Changes introduced in Facelift Models]]
* [[Option codes]] (listed in vehicle [[data card]])
* [[Differences between ECE and US models]]
* [[Differences between LHD and RHD models]]
* [[Differences between 2003 and 2004 models]]
* [[M-B Fault Error Codes/Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)| Fault Error Codes/Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)]]
* [[Workshop Training Manuals for All Mercedes-Benz|Manuals]]
* [[Operator’s Manual]]
* [[Recall Campaigns]]
* [[Reset Service Interval Indicator]]
* S320
* S350
* S400
* S430
* S500
* [[S600]]
* S55
* S63
* S65
* [[VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)]]
* W215 (CL-Class)
* [[W220 S-Class Brochure]]
* [[W220 in Movies]]
* [[Crash]]
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mercedes_W220 Wikipedia Article on Mercedes-Benz S-Class (W220)]
* [[Convenience Feature]]
* [[DAS]]
* [[Workspace]]
* [[Jacking up]]

== WIS 01 Engine, Cylinder Head and Crankshaft Housing, Oil Pan ==
* WIS 01.00 General
* [[WIS 01.10 Complete Engine]]
* [[crankcase ventilation cylinder head cover|WIS 01.20 Crankcase Ventilation, Cylinder Head Cover]]
* WIS 01.30 Cylinder Head
* WIS 01.40 Cylinder Crankcase, Timing Case Cover, End Cover
* WIS 01.45 Oil Pan

== WIS 03 Crank Assembly==
* WIS 03.00 General
* WIS 03.10 Connecting Rods, Pistons
* [[WIS 03.20 Crankshaft]]
** [[Crankshaft Position Sensor]]
* WIS 03.30 Flywheel, Drive Disc/Plate, Vibration Damper, Starter Ring Gear
** [[Vibration Damper (Harmonic Balancer)]]

==WIS 05 Engine Timing==
* WIS 05.00 General
* WIS 05.10 Timing Chain Drive, Toothed Belt Drive, Gear Drive
* WIS 05.20 Camshaft, Camshaft Adjustment
** [[Camshaft position sensor]]
* WIS 05.30 Valve, Rocker Arm, Rocker Arm Assembly
* [[Sensors - Engine Timing]]

==WIS 07 Mixture formation==
* [[Mixture formation|WIS 07.00 General]]
* WIS 07.02 Injection Pump, Plugin Pump, High Pressure Pump
* WIS 07.03 Injection Jets, Injection Valves, Lines
* WIS 07.04 Sender, Feeler, Sensors
* [[Mass air flow sensor]]
* WIS 07.09 Vacuum System
* WIS 07.16 Diesel Injection System, Common Rail
* WIS 07.41 LH Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
* [[WIS 07.61 Gasoline Engine and Injection System ME]]
* [[Oxygen sensors]]

==WIS 09 Air Intake, Turbocharging==
* [[WIS 09.10 Air Filter]]
* WIS 09.20 Intake manifold, Intake Manifold Preheater
* WIS 09.30 Intake Air Preheater
* WIS 09.40 Turbocharger
* WIS 09.40 Compressor

==WIS 14 Exhaust mainfold, engine brake, emission control system==
* WIS 14.10 Exhaust mainfold
* WIS 14.15 Engine brake
* [[Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)|WIS 14.20 Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)]]
* [[air pump|WIS 14.30 Secondary air injection, air pump]]
* WIS 14.40 Exhaust aftertreatment, AdBlue

==WIS 15 Electrical System, Engine==
* [[WIS 15.00 General]]
* [[WIS 15.10 Ignition System General]]
* WIS 15.18 Cable Sets
* WIS 15.20 Preheating System
* [[WIS 15.30 Starter Motor]]
* [[Alternator | WIS 15.40 Generator / Alternator]]
* WIS 15.50 Oil Pressure Sensor
* WIS 15.60 Temperature Sensor
* [[Midcity SmartKey starter]]

==WIS 18 Oil pump, Oil Filter, Oil Cooler==
* [[Engine oil|Engine oil: oil filter, oil change, oil cooling]]
* WIS 18.10 Oil Pump

* WIS 18.40 Oil Sensor

==WIS 20 Engine Cooling System==
* [[Engine cooling system|WIS 20.00 General]]
* [[WIS 20.10 Coolant Pump, Coolant Thermostat]]
* [[WIS 20.20 Radiator, Coolant Hoses]]
* [[Engine fan|WIS 20.40 Fan, Fan Clutch]]
* [[Engine belt|Engine belt, tensioner pulley, idler pulley]]

==WIS 22 Engine Mounts / Suspension==
* [[Engine mounts|WIS 22.10 Engine Mounts, Engine Brackets]]

==WIS 27 Automatic Transmission==
* [[WIS 27.00 Transmission Types]]
* [[WIS 27.00 Transmission - General]]
** [[DIY Transmission Service W220 WITHOUT TC Drain Plug]]
** [[DIY Transmission Service W220 WITH TC Drain Plug]]
** [[Transmission Detailed DIY Flushing System Design]]
* [[WIS 27.19 Transmission – Electrical System]]
* [[WIS 27.20 Torque Converter]]
* [[WIS 27.35 Valve Body Housing]]
* WIS 27.40 Housing
* WIS 27.50 Gear Set
* WIS 27.51 Clutch Assembly, Multidisk Brake
* WIS 27.55 Automatic Transmission, Oil Cooling System
* [[WIS 27.60 Gearshift, Control]]

==WIS 30 Regulation, Speed Control System==
* WIS 30.16 Electronic Engine Throttle Control
* [[WIS 30.30 Cruise Control (CC), Distronic (DTR)]]
* WIS 36 Speed Limiter (GB, GBE, GBL)

==WIS 32 Suspension==
* [[WIS 32.00 General]]
* WIS 32.20 Steel Springs, Torsion Bars, Nveaumat
* [[Airmatic|WIS 32.22 Air Suspension / Airmatic]]
** [[Airmatic Adjusting Levels Using DAS]]
** [[Angle Measuring Device or Inclinometer]]
* WIS 32.25 Shock Absorbers, Damper Struts, Spring Struts
* WIS 32.30 Level Control
* WIS 32.31 Level Control with Chassis Lowering
* WIS 32.32 Level Control with Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
* WIS 32.33 Ground Clearance Compensator (NR/ENR)
* WIS 32.34 Anti Roll Governor (WR)
* WIS 32.35 Stabilizer
* WIS 32.40 Hydroneumatic Suspension
* [[ABC|WIS 32.50 Active Body Control (ABC)]]

==WIS 33 Front Axle==
* [[Front axle|WIS 33.10 Complete Front Axle]]
* WIS 33.30 Drive, Differential Gear, Front Drive Shafts

==WIS 35 Rear Axle==
* [[Rear axle]]
* [[WIS 35.30 Final Drive, Rear Drive Shafts]]
* WIS 35.31 Rear Axle Centre Assembly

==WIS 40 Wheels, Wheel Alignment Check==
* [[Wheels, Tyres|WIS 40.10 Wheels, Tyres]]
* [[WIS 40.15 Tyre Pressure Monitor, Run Flat Indicator]]
* [[Wheel alignment]]

==WIS 41 Propeller/Drive Shaft==
* [[WIS 41.10 Propeller Shaft]]
* [[Disconnecting driveshaft]] (for towing W220 without damaging automatic transmission)
* [[WIS 41.40 Intermediate Bearing|Flex Disc and Intermediate Bearing]]

==WIS 42 Brakes – Hydraulics and Mechanical Components==
* [[Brakes]]

* [[Parking brake|WIS 42.20 Parking Brake]]
* WIS 42.30 Anti-locking System ABS
* [[WIS 42.45 Electronic Stability Program, Telligent® Stability Control]]

==WIS 46 Steering==
* [[Steering wheel|WIS 46.10 Steering Wheel, Steering Column Tube, Steering Shaft, Steering Lock]]
* [[Steering wheel heater|WIS 46.11 Steering Wheel Heater]]
* [[WIS 46.15 Steering Column Adjustment]]
* [[WIS 46.30 Power Steering Pump]]
* [[Steering linkage|WIS 46.40 Steering Linkage]]

== WIS 47 Fuel System==
* [[WIS 47.00 Fuel Filler Cover]]
* [[Fuel tank|Fuel tank]]
* [[Fuel pump filter|Fuel lines, pump and filter]]
* [[EVAP system|Evaporative Emission Control System]]
* [[Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)]]

==WIS 49 Exhaust System==
* [[Exhaust system|WIS 49.10 Exhaust Pipes, Catalytic Converter, Mufflers]]

==WIS 54 Electrical System, Equipment and Instruments==
* [[WIS 54.00 General]]
** [[M-B Fault Error Codes/Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)]]
* [[Battery|WIS 54.10 Battery, Power Supply, Voltage Converter]]
** [[Auxiliary battery]]
** [[DIY High Current Sensor - Quiescent Current or Parasitic Discharge Tests]]
** [[DIY Voltage Drop Across Fuses - Quiescent Current or Parasitic Discharge Tests]]
* [[Fuses|WIS 54.15 Fuse and Relay Box]]
* [[SAM (Signal Acquisition / Actuation Module)]]
* [[WIS 54.21 Control Units/Modules]]
* [[Instrument cluster|WIS 54.30 Instrument Cluster, Display Instrument, Warning System]]
* [[Fanfare horns|WIS 54.35 Signalling System (Fanfare Horns)]]
* [[Parktronic|WIS 54.65 Parktronic System (PTS)]]
* [[WIS 54.70 Proximity Warning Device Parktronic System (PTS) Distance Sensor]]

==WIS 58 Tools and Accessories==
* [[Code Readers]]
* [[EPC (Electronic Parts Catalog/Catalogue)]]
* [[Operator’s Manual]]
* [[Technical Service Bulletins (TSB)]]
* [[Special Tools]]
* [[STAR Diagnosis System (SDS) or Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS)]]
* [[STAR Service Manual on CD]]
* [[Workshop Training Manuals for All Mercedes-Benz]]

== WIS 67 Windshield and Windows==
* [[Windows|WIS 67.00 General]]
* [[Windshield|WIS 67.10 Windshield]]
* WIS 67.20 Rear Window
* WIS 67.29 Heated Rear Window – Electrical System
* [[WIS 67.39 Electric Side Windows]]

==WIS 68 Interior Equipment==
* WIS 68.00 General
** [[Dashboard]]
** [[Remove/install accelerator pedal]]
** [[Removing and installing cover below instrument panel (left)]]
** [[Removing and installing front floor covering (left)]]
** [[Removing and installing cover below instrument panel (right)]]
** [[Removing and installing front floor covering (right)]]
** [[Remove/install paneling on B-pillar]]
* WIS 68.05 Garage Door Opener
* [[WIS 68.10 Instrument Panel]]
** [[Glove compartment]]
* [[WIS 68.20 Center Console]]
* WIS 68.30 Trim, Decorative Strips
* [[rearview mirror|WIS 68.40 Rearview Mirror]]
* WIS 68.49 Rearview Mirror – Electrical System
* WIS 68.50 Curtail, Roller Sun Blind, Load Compartment Cover, Securing Cargo
* [[Sun visor]]
* [[Leather]]

==WIS 72 Doors==
* [[Doors | WIS 72.00 General]]
* [[Front doors|WIS 72.10 Front Door]]
* [[Rear doors|WIS 72.12 Rear Door]]
* [[WIS 72.29 Doors Electrical System]]
** [[Door control module]]
* [[WIS 72.30 Shutting Assist (SHI) / Close Assist / Self Close]]
** [[Pneumatic System Equipment (PSE)]]
** [[Pneumatic System Equipment (PSE) Pump]]
** [[Arduino Controlled PSE Pump]]
*** [[Arduino Controlled PSE Pump Code]]

==WIS 77 Sliding Roof, Soft Top, Mountings==
* WIS 77.00 General
* [[WIS 77.20 Electric Sliding Roof]]
* [[Roof rack]]

==WIS 80 Central Locking, Convenience Feature, Drive Authorization System==
* WIS 80.20 Central Locking System, Interior Central Locking
* WIS 80.30 Infrared Remote Control
* WIS 80.35 Radio-Frequency Actuated Remote Control
* WIS 80.40 Power Locking
* [[WIS 80.45 Convenience Feature (CF) / Convenience Locking System]]
* WIS 80.50 Anti-theft Alarm System (ATA), Interior Protection, Tow Away Protection
* [[WIS 80.57 Drive Authorization System]]
* [[Keyless-Go | WIS 80.61 Keyless-Go/Keyless Entry]]
* [[SmartKey]]

==WIS 82 Electrical System==
* [[Fuses|Fuses and Relay Boxes]]
* [[WIS 82.00 Electrical System, Body, General]]
* WIS 82.10 Exterior Lights
** [[License Plate Lights]]
** [[Head Lights]]
** [[Tail Lights]]
** [[Side Lights]]
* [[WIS 82.15 Headlamp Cleaning System]]
* [[WIS 82.20 Interior Illumination]]
** [[Full LED Interior]]
** [[Interior Door Handle Illumination]]
* [[WIS 82.25 Signalling Equipment/Emergency Alarm System]]
* [[WIS 82.30 Windshield Wiper]]
* [[windshield washing system|WIS 82.35 Windshield Washing System]]
* [[WIS 82.62 Speaker, Amplifier, Antenna]]
* WIS 82.64 CD Changer
* WIS 82.70 Telephone, Voice Control System
* [[WIS 82.85 Navigation and Communication System (CNS, ICS, COMAND, FleetBoa) A40/3]]
**[[RADIO|MB RADIO (AUDIO 10/30)]]
**[[D2B COMAND|COMAND]] ([[D2B]]) (before 01/09/2003)
***[[Mercedes Player MP40]]
**[[MOST COMAND-APS|COMAND-APS]] ([[MOST]]) (after 01/09/2003)
***[[MOST Audio Gateway|Audio Gateway]]
***[[MOST Sound Amplifier|Sound Amplifier]]
***[[MOST CD Changer|CD Changer]]
***[[MOST Navigation|Navigation]]
***[[MOST Television|Television]]
***[[MOST Satellite Radio|Satellite Radio]]
** [[Rear view camera]]
** [[COMAND Multimedia interface]]
***[[Connects2 CT90-MC04]]
***[[Car Solutions RGB-LE-V3.1]]
** [[Aftermarket COMAND replacements]]
** [[Burn mp3 Audio Files to a CD or DVD]]
* [[WIS 82.90 On-board Communication System, Multi-function Steering Wheel]]
** [[WIS 82.90 On-board Communication System, Multi-function Steering Wheel|CAN (Controller Area Network)]]
* WIS 82.95 Emergency Call System

==WIS 83 Climate Control==
* WIS 83.00 General
* WIS 83.10 Ventilation
* WIS 83.20 Heater
* [[WIS 83.30 Air Conditioning]]
* [[WIS 83.40 Automatic Climate Control (ACC) or Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)]]
** [[Pushbutton Control Module (N22)]]
** [[Overhead Control Panel (OCP) (N70)]]
** [[Automatic Climate Control (ACC) Service Menus]]
** [[Blower]]
** [[Duo Valve]]
** [[Coolant Circulation Pump]]
** [[Air Conditioning Compressor]]
** [[Cabin Ventilation Dust Filter]]
** [[Activated Charcoal Filter (ACF)]]
** [[Four Quadrant Sun Sensor (B32/2)]]
** [[Under Hood ACC Drain Access and Cleaning]]
* WIS 83.45 Air conditioner housing
* WIS 83.50 Rear air conditioning
* WIS 83.60 Rear compartment heater
* [[Auxiliary heater|WIS 83.70 Stationary heater, auxiliary heater, heater booster]]

==WIS 88 Detachable Body Components, Exterior Flaps==
* WIS 88.10 Fenders
* [[WIS 88.20 Bumpers]]
* WIS 88.40 [[Engine Hood]], Front Flap
* [[Trunk|WIS 88.50 Trunk/Boot]]
* WIS 88.60 Exterior Flaps
* [[WIS 88.70 Exterior Mirrors]]
* [[WIS 88.79 Exterior Mirrors - Electrical System]]
* WIS 88.80 Cover Strips
* [[WIS 88.85 Trim Strips]]
** [[Remove/install bottom engine compartment paneling]]

==WIS 90 Paintwork==
* [[Paintwork|WIS 90.00 General]]
* WIS 90.10 Paintwork Metal Surface
* WIS 90.20 Paintwork Plastic Surface
* WIS 90.30 Paint Care

==WIS 91 Seats, Bunks, Restraint Systems==
* [[Front seats|WIS 91.10 Front Seats]]
* [[Rear seats|WIS 91.12 Rear Seats]]
* [[WIS 91.16 Head-rest/Restraint]]
* WIS 91.20 Occasional Seat, Integrated Child Seat
* WIS 91.25 Multicontour seat
* WIS 91.27 Center Armrest
* WIS 91.29 Seat, Electrical System
* [[Seat heating and ventilation|WIS 91.30 Seat Heater, Seat Ventilation]]
* [[WIS 91.40 Seat Belts, Emergency Tensioning Retractors]]
* WIS 91.60 Airbag, Pedestrian Protection

Fuel pump filter

2026-05-02T08:50:02Z

Pokseva: Repairing fuel distributor to feed line (A2204701275)

Fuel pump and filter is mounted on the left frame floor in front of the rear axle.

{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_location.jpg|300px|]]
|
* M3 - Fuel pump
* 55/1 - Fuel filter with integrated fuel pressure regulator approx. 3.8 bars
|}

==Fuel Pump==



{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_ilustration.jpg|thumb|none|]]
|
Illustration shows screw spindle pump
* M3 - Fuel pump
|}

The task of the pump is to supply an adequate quantity of fuel to the
fuel system at the required pressure in all driving states.

On model W220 helical spindle pump is mounted at frame floor.



{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_function.jpg]]
|
Illustration shows screw spindle pump
* 1 - Rotating spindle
* 2 - Drive spindle
* 3 - Check valve
* 4 - Pressure relief valve
* 5 - Electric motor
* 6 - Ground connection
* 7 - Voltage supply
* a - Fuel from the fuel tank
* b - Fuel to the fuel filter
|}

The fuel pump (M3) pumps more fuel than the engine requires in total in order
to maintain the pressure in the fuel system in all operating states.
As a result of this circulation, relatively cool fuel is available at all times
for injection (avoids the formation of vapor bubbles).
A pressure relief valve (4) is integrated in the fuel pump in order to
limit the pressure.

The check valve (3) in the fuel pump decouples the fuel system from the fuel tank
by preventing fuel from flowing back through the fuel pump to the fuel tank.
The fuel pump is actuated by the engine control unit through the fuel pump relay.

===Parts===

====To date: 30/06/2001 (with screw connections):====
* OE - A0004707894 (EUR 370)

[[File:W220_fuel_pump_A0004707894.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump A0004707894]]

====From date: 30/06/2001 (with pluggable connections):====
* OE - A0014701294 (EUR 370)
* OEM - PIEBURG 7.28126.51.0 (EUR 155)
* BOSCH 0986580354 (EUR 173)
* TOPRAN 401632 (EUR 95)
* STARKE 162-029 (EUR 30)

[[File:W220_fuel_pump_A0014701294.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump A0014701294]]

The manufacturer of the original fuel pump is PIEBURG. Special workshops are able to open them and replace any faulty parts. The inner design of cheaper pumps is different, which leads to lower quality and noisy operation, therefore, in case of fuel pump failure, if possible, the original PIEBURG pump should be repaired.

The part number for pluggable electrical connector on the vehicle side - A1685452728.
The male part of the pluggable electrical connector on the pump side is TRUCKTEC/29.3086. The male connector can be used to convert [[facelift|pre-facelift]] fuel pump with screw connections to a pluggable connection (see the pictures below).
{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_connector_A1685452728.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump female connector (A1685452728)]]
|[[File:TRUCKTEC_29.3086.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump male connector (TRUCKTEC/29.3086)]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_connector_converter.jpg|thumb|none|Connector (positive - left, negative - right)]]
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_with_connector_converter.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump with connector]]
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_with_connector_converter_installed.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump with connector installed]]
|}

==Filter==


The task of the fuel filter is to filter impurities out of the fuel, maintaining constant fuel pressure in wide limits irrespective of the fuel pump delivery.

{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_design2.png|300px|]]
|
* 55/1 - Fuel filter with integrated fuel pressure regulator
* CAN - Pressurization line
* PUMP - Feed from fuel pump
* TANK - Return flow to fuel tank
* MOT - To engine
|}




{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_design.jpg|400px]]
|
* 55/1 - Fuel filter with integrated fuel pressure regulator
* 55/3 - Valve
* 55/5 - Diaphragm (membrane)
* 55/6 - Compression (push) spring
* 55/9 - Filter element insert
* 55/40 - Diaphragm pressure regulator

* A - Feed from fuel pump
* b - Diaphragm pressure regulator vent line
* B - Fuel return flow to fuel tank
* C - Fuel pressure connection to engine
|}

The fuel filter consists of a sheet metal casing with an integrated filter
element (55/9). The fuel flows through this from the outside to the
inside. As a result any impurities are trapped.

The diaphragm pressure regulator (55/40) controls the fuel pressure
of approx. 3.8 bar (operating pessure) via the fuel return flow
quantity to the fuel tank.

If the set fuel pressure is exceeded, the diaphragm (55/5) is pushed
against the push spring (55/6) and the valve (55/3) attached to the
diaphragm opens the passage for the fuel return to the fuel tank (B).
If the set pressure is below the limit, the valve is closed again by
means of the push spring.

{|
|[[File:Fuel_pressure_as_a_function_of_the_fuel_pump_delivery.png|thumb|none|Fuel pressure as a function of the fuel pump delivery]]
|
* A - Fuel pressure in bar
* B - Fuel pump delivery in liters per hour
|}

A greatly varying fuel pump delivery (e.g. 20 or 140 l/h) does not have any great effect on the fuel pressure.

===Parts===

* OE A0024773001 OE (EUR 100)
* OEM Knecht KL82 (EUR 38)
* OEM BOSCH 0450915003 (EUR 40)
* MANN-FILTER WK 720 (EUR 45)

{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_BOSCH_0450915003.jpg|thumb|none|BOSCH 0450915003]]
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_MANN-FILTER_WK_720.jpg|thumb|none|MANN-FILTER WK 720]]
|}

== Fuel pump package ==

[[File:W220_fuel_pump_package.png|500px]]

Identifying the components in this diagram with same nomenclature as above:
{| class="wikitable"
! Part
! Part no.
! Image
! Description
|-
|60
|A2024766526 (from date 2001/04/07)

Gates 10mm (inner) x 16mm (outer) x v20cm (length)
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_A2024766526.jpg|300px]]
|Hose between filter and fuel tank fuel return line. 15.3X3MM; 200MM
|-
|70
|A0019976990

Hose clamp ABA Mini 15mm
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_clamp_A0019976990.jpg|300px]]
|Clamp for hose between filter and tank (x2 - both ends). 9-13MM
|-
|25
|A0069971890

Hose clamp ABA Mini 13mm
|[[File:W220_fuel_clamp_A0069971890.jpg|300px]]
|Hose clamp 13-14.5MM:
* Clamp for hose between pump and filter (x2 - both ends)
* Clamp for hose between filter and engine fuel delivery line (x2 - both ends)
|-
|10
|A2304768726

Gates 8mm (inner) x 14mm (outer) x 11.5cm (length)
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_A2304768726.jpg|300px]]
|Hose between pump and filter. 7.3X3MM; 115MM (order by the meter)
|-
|17
|A2304768726

Gates 8mm (inner) x 14mm (outer) x 30cm (length)
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_A2304768726.jpg|300px]]
|Hose between filter and engine fuel delivery line. 7.3X3MM (order by the meter)
|-
|40
|A2024711341 (15 EUR)
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_pump_bracket_A2024711341.jpg|300px]]
|Backet. Fuel pump package
|-
|50
|N000000002053

M5x35mm
|[[File:W220_bolt_at_fuel_pump_bracket_N000000002053.jpg|300px]]
|Bolt. At fuel pump bracket.
|-
|75
|A2104780340
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_bracket_A2104780340.jpg|300px]]
|Backet. Fuel pump package
|-
|130
|A0039900251

FEBI BILSTEIN 39075
|[[File:A0039900251_screw.jpg|300px]]
|Screwing to attach protective cowl (3 pcs)
|}

== Fuel lines (gasoline vehicles) ==
[[File:W220_fuel_lines_gasoline_vehicles.png|500px]]

Identifying the components in this diagram with same nomenclature as above:
{| class="wikitable"
! Part
! Part no.
! Image
! Description
|-
|5
|A2204762675 (replaced by A2204762875) (EUR 77)
|[[File:W220_hose_fuel_tank_to_fuel_pump_A2204762875.jpg|300px]]
|Fuel hose from tank to fuel pump
|-
|10
|A0069971990
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_clamp_A0069971990.jpg|300px]]
|Clamp. Fuel hose to fuel pump 21.5-22.5 MM
|-
|20
|A2104765527
|
|Hose. Breather line to fuel filter
|-
|25
|A2204701275
|[[File:A2204701275_fuel_distributor_to_feed_line.jpg|300px]]
|Fuel distributor to feed line
|}

== Repairing fuel distributor to feed line (A2204701275) ==

In case of leakage, the fuel distributor feed line (A2204701275) can be repaired by reusing the original end fittings and attaching a new steel-braided rubber hose.

A suitable replacement is the “Mocal SAE J30R9 high-pressure braided fuel hose, 7.9 mm (5/16")”. A length of 60 cm is required (~26 EUR per meter).

{|
|[[File:A2204701275_fuel_hose_leaking.jpg|thumb|Leaking fuel hose]]
|[[File:A2204701275_fuel_hose_repair_parts.jpg|thumb|Fuel hose parts]]
|[[File:A2204701275_fuel_hose_repaired.jpg|thumb|Repaired hose installed]]
|}

== Testing fuel pressure ==

Remove Schrader valve cap from the fuel rail fuel pressure port and connect your fuel pressure tester. Be extremely careful during this test procedure as if fuel falls on hot engine parts it may cause a fire. Never carry this test if the engine is hot.

The fuel pressure should build up as soon as you turn on the ignition before you even try to crank the engine and the pressure should not drop after turning on the ignition. The pressure reading should be around 3.8 bars. If the pressure is not maintained then the cause can be either a faulty fuel filter or a faulty fuel pump.

[[File:W220_Engine_112.972_fuel_pressure.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pressure reading 3.8 bars]]

== Fuel pump and filter replacement ==

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://youtu.be/aawfkE6-DEc|320|center|Fuel filter replacement video (By Masood)|frame}}
|}

[[File:W220_fuel_pump_replacement.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump with hose clamps]]

Fuel pump filter

2026-05-02T08:41:35Z

Pokseva: /* Fuel lines (gasoline vehicles) */

Fuel pump and filter is mounted on the left frame floor in front of the rear axle.

{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_location.jpg|300px|]]
|
* M3 - Fuel pump
* 55/1 - Fuel filter with integrated fuel pressure regulator approx. 3.8 bars
|}

==Fuel Pump==



{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_ilustration.jpg|thumb|none|]]
|
Illustration shows screw spindle pump
* M3 - Fuel pump
|}

The task of the pump is to supply an adequate quantity of fuel to the
fuel system at the required pressure in all driving states.

On model W220 helical spindle pump is mounted at frame floor.



{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_function.jpg]]
|
Illustration shows screw spindle pump
* 1 - Rotating spindle
* 2 - Drive spindle
* 3 - Check valve
* 4 - Pressure relief valve
* 5 - Electric motor
* 6 - Ground connection
* 7 - Voltage supply
* a - Fuel from the fuel tank
* b - Fuel to the fuel filter
|}

The fuel pump (M3) pumps more fuel than the engine requires in total in order
to maintain the pressure in the fuel system in all operating states.
As a result of this circulation, relatively cool fuel is available at all times
for injection (avoids the formation of vapor bubbles).
A pressure relief valve (4) is integrated in the fuel pump in order to
limit the pressure.

The check valve (3) in the fuel pump decouples the fuel system from the fuel tank
by preventing fuel from flowing back through the fuel pump to the fuel tank.
The fuel pump is actuated by the engine control unit through the fuel pump relay.

===Parts===

====To date: 30/06/2001 (with screw connections):====
* OE - A0004707894 (EUR 370)

[[File:W220_fuel_pump_A0004707894.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump A0004707894]]

====From date: 30/06/2001 (with pluggable connections):====
* OE - A0014701294 (EUR 370)
* OEM - PIEBURG 7.28126.51.0 (EUR 155)
* BOSCH 0986580354 (EUR 173)
* TOPRAN 401632 (EUR 95)
* STARKE 162-029 (EUR 30)

[[File:W220_fuel_pump_A0014701294.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump A0014701294]]

The manufacturer of the original fuel pump is PIEBURG. Special workshops are able to open them and replace any faulty parts. The inner design of cheaper pumps is different, which leads to lower quality and noisy operation, therefore, in case of fuel pump failure, if possible, the original PIEBURG pump should be repaired.

The part number for pluggable electrical connector on the vehicle side - A1685452728.
The male part of the pluggable electrical connector on the pump side is TRUCKTEC/29.3086. The male connector can be used to convert [[facelift|pre-facelift]] fuel pump with screw connections to a pluggable connection (see the pictures below).
{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_connector_A1685452728.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump female connector (A1685452728)]]
|[[File:TRUCKTEC_29.3086.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump male connector (TRUCKTEC/29.3086)]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_connector_converter.jpg|thumb|none|Connector (positive - left, negative - right)]]
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_with_connector_converter.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump with connector]]
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_with_connector_converter_installed.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump with connector installed]]
|}

==Filter==


The task of the fuel filter is to filter impurities out of the fuel, maintaining constant fuel pressure in wide limits irrespective of the fuel pump delivery.

{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_design2.png|300px|]]
|
* 55/1 - Fuel filter with integrated fuel pressure regulator
* CAN - Pressurization line
* PUMP - Feed from fuel pump
* TANK - Return flow to fuel tank
* MOT - To engine
|}




{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_design.jpg|400px]]
|
* 55/1 - Fuel filter with integrated fuel pressure regulator
* 55/3 - Valve
* 55/5 - Diaphragm (membrane)
* 55/6 - Compression (push) spring
* 55/9 - Filter element insert
* 55/40 - Diaphragm pressure regulator

* A - Feed from fuel pump
* b - Diaphragm pressure regulator vent line
* B - Fuel return flow to fuel tank
* C - Fuel pressure connection to engine
|}

The fuel filter consists of a sheet metal casing with an integrated filter
element (55/9). The fuel flows through this from the outside to the
inside. As a result any impurities are trapped.

The diaphragm pressure regulator (55/40) controls the fuel pressure
of approx. 3.8 bar (operating pessure) via the fuel return flow
quantity to the fuel tank.

If the set fuel pressure is exceeded, the diaphragm (55/5) is pushed
against the push spring (55/6) and the valve (55/3) attached to the
diaphragm opens the passage for the fuel return to the fuel tank (B).
If the set pressure is below the limit, the valve is closed again by
means of the push spring.

{|
|[[File:Fuel_pressure_as_a_function_of_the_fuel_pump_delivery.png|thumb|none|Fuel pressure as a function of the fuel pump delivery]]
|
* A - Fuel pressure in bar
* B - Fuel pump delivery in liters per hour
|}

A greatly varying fuel pump delivery (e.g. 20 or 140 l/h) does not have any great effect on the fuel pressure.

===Parts===

* OE A0024773001 OE (EUR 100)
* OEM Knecht KL82 (EUR 38)
* OEM BOSCH 0450915003 (EUR 40)
* MANN-FILTER WK 720 (EUR 45)

{|
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_BOSCH_0450915003.jpg|thumb|none|BOSCH 0450915003]]
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_MANN-FILTER_WK_720.jpg|thumb|none|MANN-FILTER WK 720]]
|}

== Fuel pump package ==

[[File:W220_fuel_pump_package.png|500px]]

Identifying the components in this diagram with same nomenclature as above:
{| class="wikitable"
! Part
! Part no.
! Image
! Description
|-
|60
|A2024766526 (from date 2001/04/07)

Gates 10mm (inner) x 16mm (outer) x v20cm (length)
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_A2024766526.jpg|300px]]
|Hose between filter and fuel tank fuel return line. 15.3X3MM; 200MM
|-
|70
|A0019976990

Hose clamp ABA Mini 15mm
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_clamp_A0019976990.jpg|300px]]
|Clamp for hose between filter and tank (x2 - both ends). 9-13MM
|-
|25
|A0069971890

Hose clamp ABA Mini 13mm
|[[File:W220_fuel_clamp_A0069971890.jpg|300px]]
|Hose clamp 13-14.5MM:
* Clamp for hose between pump and filter (x2 - both ends)
* Clamp for hose between filter and engine fuel delivery line (x2 - both ends)
|-
|10
|A2304768726

Gates 8mm (inner) x 14mm (outer) x 11.5cm (length)
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_A2304768726.jpg|300px]]
|Hose between pump and filter. 7.3X3MM; 115MM (order by the meter)
|-
|17
|A2304768726

Gates 8mm (inner) x 14mm (outer) x 30cm (length)
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_A2304768726.jpg|300px]]
|Hose between filter and engine fuel delivery line. 7.3X3MM (order by the meter)
|-
|40
|A2024711341 (15 EUR)
|[[File:W220_fuel_filter_pump_bracket_A2024711341.jpg|300px]]
|Backet. Fuel pump package
|-
|50
|N000000002053

M5x35mm
|[[File:W220_bolt_at_fuel_pump_bracket_N000000002053.jpg|300px]]
|Bolt. At fuel pump bracket.
|-
|75
|A2104780340
|[[File:W220_fuel_pump_bracket_A2104780340.jpg|300px]]
|Backet. Fuel pump package
|-
|130
|A0039900251

FEBI BILSTEIN 39075
|[[File:A0039900251_screw.jpg|300px]]
|Screwing to attach protective cowl (3 pcs)
|}

== Fuel lines (gasoline vehicles) ==
[[File:W220_fuel_lines_gasoline_vehicles.png|500px]]

Identifying the components in this diagram with same nomenclature as above:
{| class="wikitable"
! Part
! Part no.
! Image
! Description
|-
|5
|A2204762675 (replaced by A2204762875) (EUR 77)
|[[File:W220_hose_fuel_tank_to_fuel_pump_A2204762875.jpg|300px]]
|Fuel hose from tank to fuel pump
|-
|10
|A0069971990
|[[File:W220_fuel_hose_clamp_A0069971990.jpg|300px]]
|Clamp. Fuel hose to fuel pump 21.5-22.5 MM
|-
|20
|A2104765527
|
|Hose. Breather line to fuel filter
|-
|25
|A2204701275
|[[File:A2204701275_fuel_distributor_to_feed_line.jpg|300px]]
|Fuel distributor to feed line
|}

== Testing fuel pressure ==

Remove Schrader valve cap from the fuel rail fuel pressure port and connect your fuel pressure tester. Be extremely careful during this test procedure as if fuel falls on hot engine parts it may cause a fire. Never carry this test if the engine is hot.

The fuel pressure should build up as soon as you turn on the ignition before you even try to crank the engine and the pressure should not drop after turning on the ignition. The pressure reading should be around 3.8 bars. If the pressure is not maintained then the cause can be either a faulty fuel filter or a faulty fuel pump.

[[File:W220_Engine_112.972_fuel_pressure.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pressure reading 3.8 bars]]

== Fuel pump and filter replacement ==

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://youtu.be/aawfkE6-DEc|320|center|Fuel filter replacement video (By Masood)|frame}}
|}

[[File:W220_fuel_pump_replacement.jpg|thumb|none|Fuel pump with hose clamps]]

File:A2204701275 fuel hose repair parts.jpg

2026-05-02T08:38:26Z

Pokseva:

File:A2204701275 fuel hose repaired.jpg

2026-05-02T08:38:15Z

Pokseva:

File:A2204701275 fuel hose leaking.jpg

2026-05-02T08:38:04Z

Pokseva:

File:A2204701275 fuel distributor to feed line.jpg

2026-05-02T08:37:51Z

Pokseva:

Index

2026-04-25T09:40:15Z

Pokseva: /* WIS 07 Mixture formation */

{{DISPLAYTITLE:Mercedes-Benz S-Class W220 Wiki Encyclopedia}}

<div class="noautonum">__TOC__</div>

=='''START HERE''' at the List of Key Words With Links to Relevant Sections==
[[Key Words with Links to Relevant Sections]]

==W220 Wiki Purpose and Guidelines==
[[W220 Encyclopedia:About]]

==Template for W220 Wiki Articles (Copy and Paste to start a new article)==
[[Template for W220 Wiki Articles]]

==WIS 00 Overall Vehicle General Information==
* [[Acronyms and Abbreviations]]
* [[Components | Component numbers and locations]]
* [[BRABUS]]
* [[Buying Guide]]
* Changes between previous S-Class models
* [[Facelift | Changes introduced in Facelift Models]]
* [[Option codes]] (listed in vehicle [[data card]])
* [[Differences between ECE and US models]]
* [[Differences between LHD and RHD models]]
* [[Differences between 2003 and 2004 models]]
* [[M-B Fault Error Codes/Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)| Fault Error Codes/Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)]]
* [[Workshop Training Manuals for All Mercedes-Benz|Manuals]]
* [[Operator’s Manual]]
* [[Recall Campaigns]]
* [[Reset Service Interval Indicator]]
* S320
* S350
* S400
* S430
* S500
* [[S600]]
* S55
* S63
* S65
* [[VIN (Vehicle Identification Number)]]
* W215 (CL-Class)
* [[W220 S-Class Brochure]]
* [[W220 in Movies]]
* [[Crash]]
* [http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Mercedes_W220 Wikipedia Article on Mercedes-Benz S-Class (W220)]
* [[Convenience Feature]]
* [[DAS]]
* [[Workspace]]
* [[Jacking up]]

== WIS 01 Engine, Cylinder Head and Crankshaft Housing, Oil Pan ==
* WIS 01.00 General
* [[WIS 01.10 Complete Engine]]
* [[crankcase ventilation cylinder head cover|WIS 01.20 Crankcase Ventilation, Cylinder Head Cover]]
* WIS 01.30 Cylinder Head
* WIS 01.40 Cylinder Crankcase, Timing Case Cover, End Cover
* WIS 01.45 Oil Pan

== WIS 03 Crank Assembly==
* WIS 03.00 General
* WIS 03.10 Connecting Rods, Pistons
* [[WIS 03.20 Crankshaft]]
** [[Crankshaft Position Sensor]]
* WIS 03.30 Flywheel, Drive Disc/Plate, Vibration Damper, Starter Ring Gear
** [[Vibration Damper (Harmonic Balancer)]]

==WIS 05 Engine Timing==
* WIS 05.00 General
* WIS 05.10 Timing Chain Drive, Toothed Belt Drive, Gear Drive
* WIS 05.20 Camshaft, Camshaft Adjustment
** [[Camshaft position sensor]]
* WIS 05.30 Valve, Rocker Arm, Rocker Arm Assembly
* [[Sensors - Engine Timing]]

==WIS 07 Mixture formation==
* [[Mixture formation|WIS 07.00 General]]
* WIS 07.02 Injection Pump, Plugin Pump, High Pressure Pump
* WIS 07.03 Injection Jets, Injection Valves, Lines
* WIS 07.04 Sender, Feeler, Sensors
* [[Mass air flow sensor]]
* WIS 07.09 Vacuum System
* WIS 07.16 Diesel Injection System, Common Rail
* WIS 07.41 LH Sequential Multiport Fuel Injection System
* [[WIS 07.61 Gasoline Engine and Injection System ME]]
* [[Oxygen sensors]]

==WIS 09 Air Intake, Turbocharging==
* [[WIS 09.10 Air Filter]]
* WIS 09.20 Intake manifold, Intake Manifold Preheater
* WIS 09.30 Intake Air Preheater
* WIS 09.40 Turbocharger
* WIS 09.40 Compressor

==WIS 14 Exhaust mainfold, engine brake, emission control system==
* WIS 14.10 Exhaust mainfold
* WIS 14.15 Engine brake
* [[Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)|WIS 14.20 Exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)]]
* [[air pump|WIS 14.30 Secondary air injection, air pump]]
* WIS 14.40 Exhaust aftertreatment, AdBlue

==WIS 15 Electrical System, Engine==
* [[WIS 15.00 General]]
* [[WIS 15.10 Ignition System General]]
* WIS 15.18 Cable Sets
* WIS 15.20 Preheating System
* [[WIS 15.30 Starter Motor]]
* [[Alternator | WIS 15.40 Generator / Alternator]]
* WIS 15.50 Oil Pressure Sensor
* WIS 15.60 Temperature Sensor
* [[Midcity SmartKey starter]]

==WIS 18 Oil pump, Oil Filter, Oil Cooler==
* [[Engine oil|Engine oil: oil filter, oil change, oil cooling]]
* WIS 18.10 Oil Pump

* WIS 18.40 Oil Sensor

==WIS 20 Engine Cooling System==
* [[Engine cooling system|WIS 20.00 General]]
* [[WIS 20.10 Coolant Pump, Coolant Thermostat]]
* [[WIS 20.20 Radiator, Coolant Hoses]]
* [[Engine fan|WIS 20.40 Fan, Fan Clutch]]
* [[Engine belt|Engine belt, tensioner pulley, idler pulley]]

==WIS 22 Engine Mounts / Suspension==
* [[Engine mounts|WIS 22.10 Engine Mounts, Engine Brackets]]

==WIS 27 Automatic Transmission==
* [[WIS 27.00 Transmission Types]]
* [[WIS 27.00 Transmission - General]]
** [[DIY Transmission Service W220 WITHOUT TC Drain Plug]]
** [[DIY Transmission Service W220 WITH TC Drain Plug]]
** [[Transmission Detailed DIY Flushing System Design]]
* [[WIS 27.19 Transmission – Electrical System]]
* [[WIS 27.20 Torque Converter]]
* [[WIS 27.35 Valve Body Housing]]
* WIS 27.40 Housing
* WIS 27.50 Gear Set
* WIS 27.51 Clutch Assembly, Multidisk Brake
* WIS 27.55 Automatic Transmission, Oil Cooling System
* [[WIS 27.60 Gearshift, Control]]

==WIS 30 Regulation, Speed Control System==
* WIS 30.16 Electronic Engine Throttle Control
* [[WIS 30.30 Cruise Control (CC), Distronic (DTR)]]
* WIS 36 Speed Limiter (GB, GBE, GBL)

==WIS 32 Suspension==
* [[WIS 32.00 General]]
* WIS 32.20 Steel Springs, Torsion Bars, Nveaumat
* [[Airmatic|WIS 32.22 Air Suspension / Airmatic]]
** [[Airmatic Adjusting Levels Using DAS]]
** [[Angle Measuring Device or Inclinometer]]
* WIS 32.25 Shock Absorbers, Damper Struts, Spring Struts
* WIS 32.30 Level Control
* WIS 32.31 Level Control with Chassis Lowering
* WIS 32.32 Level Control with Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
* WIS 32.33 Ground Clearance Compensator (NR/ENR)
* WIS 32.34 Anti Roll Governor (WR)
* WIS 32.35 Stabilizer
* WIS 32.40 Hydroneumatic Suspension
* [[ABC|WIS 32.50 Active Body Control (ABC)]]

==WIS 33 Front Axle==
* [[Front axle|WIS 33.10 Complete Front Axle]]
* WIS 33.30 Drive, Differential Gear, Front Drive Shafts

==WIS 35 Rear Axle==
* [[Rear axle]]
* [[WIS 35.30 Final Drive, Rear Drive Shafts]]
* WIS 35.31 Rear Axle Centre Assembly

==WIS 40 Wheels, Wheel Alignment Check==
* [[Wheels, Tyres|WIS 40.10 Wheels, Tyres]]
* [[WIS 40.15 Tyre Pressure Monitor, Run Flat Indicator]]
* [[Wheel alignment]]

==WIS 41 Propeller/Drive Shaft==
* [[WIS 41.10 Propeller Shaft]]
* [[Disconnecting driveshaft]] (for towing W220 without damaging automatic transmission)
* [[WIS 41.40 Intermediate Bearing|Flex Disc and Intermediate Bearing]]

==WIS 42 Brakes – Hydraulics and Mechanical Components==
* [[Brakes]]

* [[Parking brake|WIS 42.20 Parking Brake]]
* WIS 42.30 Anti-locking System ABS
* [[WIS 42.45 Electronic Stability Program, Telligent® Stability Control]]

==WIS 46 Steering==
* [[Steering wheel|WIS 46.10 Steering Wheel, Steering Column Tube, Steering Shaft, Steering Lock]]
* [[Steering wheel heater|WIS 46.11 Steering Wheel Heater]]
* [[WIS 46.15 Steering Column Adjustment]]
* [[WIS 46.30 Power Steering Pump]]
* [[Steering linkage|WIS 46.40 Steering Linkage]]

== WIS 47 Fuel System==
* [[WIS 47.00 Fuel Filler Cover]]
* [[Fuel tank|WIS 47.10 Fuel tank]]
* [[Fuel pump filter|WIS 47.20 Fuel Pump, Filter]]
* [[EVAP system|WIS 47.30 Evaporative Emission Control System]]
* [[Liquefied Petroleum Gas (LPG)]]

==WIS 49 Exhaust System==
* [[Exhaust system|WIS 49.10 Exhaust Pipes, Catalytic Converter, Mufflers]]

==WIS 54 Electrical System, Equipment and Instruments==
* [[WIS 54.00 General]]
** [[M-B Fault Error Codes/Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC)]]
* [[Battery|WIS 54.10 Battery, Power Supply, Voltage Converter]]
** [[Auxiliary battery]]
** [[DIY High Current Sensor - Quiescent Current or Parasitic Discharge Tests]]
** [[DIY Voltage Drop Across Fuses - Quiescent Current or Parasitic Discharge Tests]]
* [[Fuses|WIS 54.15 Fuse and Relay Box]]
* [[SAM (Signal Acquisition / Actuation Module)]]
* [[WIS 54.21 Control Units/Modules]]
* [[Instrument cluster|WIS 54.30 Instrument Cluster, Display Instrument, Warning System]]
* [[Fanfare horns|WIS 54.35 Signalling System (Fanfare Horns)]]
* [[Parktronic|WIS 54.65 Parktronic System (PTS)]]
* [[WIS 54.70 Proximity Warning Device Parktronic System (PTS) Distance Sensor]]

==WIS 58 Tools and Accessories==
* [[Code Readers]]
* [[EPC (Electronic Parts Catalog/Catalogue)]]
* [[Operator’s Manual]]
* [[Technical Service Bulletins (TSB)]]
* [[Special Tools]]
* [[STAR Diagnosis System (SDS) or Diagnosis Assistance System (DAS)]]
* [[STAR Service Manual on CD]]
* [[Workshop Training Manuals for All Mercedes-Benz]]

== WIS 67 Windshield and Windows==
* [[Windows|WIS 67.00 General]]
* [[Windshield|WIS 67.10 Windshield]]
* WIS 67.20 Rear Window
* WIS 67.29 Heated Rear Window – Electrical System
* [[WIS 67.39 Electric Side Windows]]

==WIS 68 Interior Equipment==
* WIS 68.00 General
** [[Dashboard]]
** [[Remove/install accelerator pedal]]
** [[Removing and installing cover below instrument panel (left)]]
** [[Removing and installing front floor covering (left)]]
** [[Removing and installing cover below instrument panel (right)]]
** [[Removing and installing front floor covering (right)]]
** [[Remove/install paneling on B-pillar]]
* WIS 68.05 Garage Door Opener
* [[WIS 68.10 Instrument Panel]]
** [[Glove compartment]]
* [[WIS 68.20 Center Console]]
* WIS 68.30 Trim, Decorative Strips
* [[rearview mirror|WIS 68.40 Rearview Mirror]]
* WIS 68.49 Rearview Mirror – Electrical System
* WIS 68.50 Curtail, Roller Sun Blind, Load Compartment Cover, Securing Cargo
* [[Sun visor]]
* [[Leather]]

==WIS 72 Doors==
* [[Doors | WIS 72.00 General]]
* [[Front doors|WIS 72.10 Front Door]]
* [[Rear doors|WIS 72.12 Rear Door]]
* [[WIS 72.29 Doors Electrical System]]
** [[Door control module]]
* [[WIS 72.30 Shutting Assist (SHI) / Close Assist / Self Close]]
** [[Pneumatic System Equipment (PSE)]]
** [[Pneumatic System Equipment (PSE) Pump]]
** [[Arduino Controlled PSE Pump]]
*** [[Arduino Controlled PSE Pump Code]]

==WIS 77 Sliding Roof, Soft Top, Mountings==
* WIS 77.00 General
* [[WIS 77.20 Electric Sliding Roof]]
* [[Roof rack]]

==WIS 80 Central Locking, Convenience Feature, Drive Authorization System==
* WIS 80.20 Central Locking System, Interior Central Locking
* WIS 80.30 Infrared Remote Control
* WIS 80.35 Radio-Frequency Actuated Remote Control
* WIS 80.40 Power Locking
* [[WIS 80.45 Convenience Feature (CF) / Convenience Locking System]]
* WIS 80.50 Anti-theft Alarm System (ATA), Interior Protection, Tow Away Protection
* [[WIS 80.57 Drive Authorization System]]
* [[Keyless-Go | WIS 80.61 Keyless-Go/Keyless Entry]]
* [[SmartKey]]

==WIS 82 Electrical System==
* [[Fuses|Fuses and Relay Boxes]]
* [[WIS 82.00 Electrical System, Body, General]]
* WIS 82.10 Exterior Lights
** [[License Plate Lights]]
** [[Head Lights]]
** [[Tail Lights]]
** [[Side Lights]]
* [[WIS 82.15 Headlamp Cleaning System]]
* [[WIS 82.20 Interior Illumination]]
** [[Full LED Interior]]
** [[Interior Door Handle Illumination]]
* [[WIS 82.25 Signalling Equipment/Emergency Alarm System]]
* [[WIS 82.30 Windshield Wiper]]
* [[windshield washing system|WIS 82.35 Windshield Washing System]]
* [[WIS 82.62 Speaker, Amplifier, Antenna]]
* WIS 82.64 CD Changer
* WIS 82.70 Telephone, Voice Control System
* [[WIS 82.85 Navigation and Communication System (CNS, ICS, COMAND, FleetBoa) A40/3]]
**[[RADIO|MB RADIO (AUDIO 10/30)]]
**[[D2B COMAND|COMAND]] ([[D2B]]) (before 01/09/2003)
***[[Mercedes Player MP40]]
**[[MOST COMAND-APS|COMAND-APS]] ([[MOST]]) (after 01/09/2003)
***[[MOST Audio Gateway|Audio Gateway]]
***[[MOST Sound Amplifier|Sound Amplifier]]
***[[MOST CD Changer|CD Changer]]
***[[MOST Navigation|Navigation]]
***[[MOST Television|Television]]
***[[MOST Satellite Radio|Satellite Radio]]
** [[Rear view camera]]
** [[COMAND Multimedia interface]]
***[[Connects2 CT90-MC04]]
***[[Car Solutions RGB-LE-V3.1]]
** [[Aftermarket COMAND replacements]]
** [[Burn mp3 Audio Files to a CD or DVD]]
* [[WIS 82.90 On-board Communication System, Multi-function Steering Wheel]]
** [[WIS 82.90 On-board Communication System, Multi-function Steering Wheel|CAN (Controller Area Network)]]
* WIS 82.95 Emergency Call System

==WIS 83 Climate Control==
* WIS 83.00 General
* WIS 83.10 Ventilation
* WIS 83.20 Heater
* [[WIS 83.30 Air Conditioning]]
* [[WIS 83.40 Automatic Climate Control (ACC) or Heating Ventilation and Air Conditioning (HVAC)]]
** [[Pushbutton Control Module (N22)]]
** [[Overhead Control Panel (OCP) (N70)]]
** [[Automatic Climate Control (ACC) Service Menus]]
** [[Blower]]
** [[Duo Valve]]
** [[Coolant Circulation Pump]]
** [[Air Conditioning Compressor]]
** [[Cabin Ventilation Dust Filter]]
** [[Activated Charcoal Filter (ACF)]]
** [[Four Quadrant Sun Sensor (B32/2)]]
** [[Under Hood ACC Drain Access and Cleaning]]
* WIS 83.45 Air conditioner housing
* WIS 83.50 Rear air conditioning
* WIS 83.60 Rear compartment heater
* [[Auxiliary heater|WIS 83.70 Stationary heater, auxiliary heater, heater booster]]

==WIS 88 Detachable Body Components, Exterior Flaps==
* WIS 88.10 Fenders
* [[WIS 88.20 Bumpers]]
* WIS 88.40 [[Engine Hood]], Front Flap
* [[Trunk|WIS 88.50 Trunk/Boot]]
* WIS 88.60 Exterior Flaps
* [[WIS 88.70 Exterior Mirrors]]
* [[WIS 88.79 Exterior Mirrors - Electrical System]]
* WIS 88.80 Cover Strips
* [[WIS 88.85 Trim Strips]]
** [[Remove/install bottom engine compartment paneling]]

==WIS 90 Paintwork==
* [[Paintwork|WIS 90.00 General]]
* WIS 90.10 Paintwork Metal Surface
* WIS 90.20 Paintwork Plastic Surface
* WIS 90.30 Paint Care

==WIS 91 Seats, Bunks, Restraint Systems==
* [[Front seats|WIS 91.10 Front Seats]]
* [[Rear seats|WIS 91.12 Rear Seats]]
* [[WIS 91.16 Head-rest/Restraint]]
* WIS 91.20 Occasional Seat, Integrated Child Seat
* WIS 91.25 Multicontour seat
* WIS 91.27 Center Armrest
* WIS 91.29 Seat, Electrical System
* [[Seat heating and ventilation|WIS 91.30 Seat Heater, Seat Ventilation]]
* [[WIS 91.40 Seat Belts, Emergency Tensioning Retractors]]
* WIS 91.60 Airbag, Pedestrian Protection

Headlights

2025-12-20T19:10:11Z

Pokseva: /* Xenon headlamp control module (ballast) */ Added information about Chinese ballasts available for 15 EUR on Aliexpress

==Introduction - Headlight Systems==
===HID Xenon Systems===
HID stands for High-Intensity Discharge. Xenon is the type of gas inside the bulb. Xenon bulbs can produce a brighter, whiter light than a halogen car, and tend to have a longer lifespan. The bulb works in a different way to a halogen. Instead of a filament heating up and glowing, xenon headlights use electrodes to discharge the gas inside the bulb. This produces the light you see on the road. In order for xenon bulbs to work they require electronic ballasts, and ignitors to generate the high voltages required to discharge the gas.

HID xenon headlight systems come in two different types, xenon and bi-xenon.

===HID Xenon Headlight Systems===
HID '''xenon''' headlight systems use two separate bulbs for the high and low beam illumination. The main high beam system uses xenon bulbs, electronic ballasts, and ignitors. A separate conventional halogen bulb is also fitted for low beam.
===HID Bi-xenon Headlight Systems===
HID '''bi-xenon''' headlight systems use one bulb for both high and low beam illumination. To achieve low and high beam illumination with a single HID bi-xenon bulb, it is used in conjunction with a lens projector which has a solenoid/motor that is attached to a cutoff plate or shield. When the 'high beams' are activated a signal is sent to the solenoid and the motor will lower the cutoff plate/shield allowing more light to shine above the shield; hence high beams.
{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iP4WXHmRpjs|400|center|Bi-xenon Projectors|frame}}
<br clear=all>
A pair of separate conventional halogen globes are also used to provide instant illumination and a support and backup to the bi-xenon system.

===Halogen Systems===
Halogen headlight systems use separate low beam and high beam bulbs in different locations. Sometimes dual filament bulbs are used to produce both high and low beams in one bulb. Halogen bulbs are cheap to manufacture, plus they’re very simple to replace. Inside the bulb is a filament made out of tungsten and halogen gas. The bulb lights up when electricity reaches the filament, heating up the tungsten which begins to glow. Most halogen headlamps produce a colour temperature between approximately 3200K and 5000K. The higher the Kelvin rating, the cooler and bluer the light will be.

Be careful when replacing a halogen bulb. It is popular to replace a standard halogen with an aftermarket bulb in order to achieve a white/blue tint. After market globes usually achieve this by applying a blue coating to the bulb, which the light then shines through. However, this can compromise the light output of the bulb as the blue coating can obscure the amount of light that can penetrate it. Some after market halogens are now turning to a clever xenon and halogen gas mix, which helps to produce a whiter light than the halogen gas can on its own. Be sure to use the same wattage as the original.

===LED Systems===
Modern LED bulbs are proving to be very popular as they can produce an extremely white light. They are much more efficient, due to their long lifetime and the low wattage they require to work. LED bulbs were never fitted as original equipment for W220 high or low beams. Fitting them to W220s as after market equipment poses problems due to the sophisticated bulb monitoring system built into the W220. Due to their low current draw they will be detected as blown globes and may even flash instead of producing constant light. They also need to be cooled from the back of the bulb and may require a redesign of the lens assembly.

==Description==
W220's were built with two completely different main headlight systems, namely;
* High Intensity Discharge (HID) systems using bi-xenon bulbs with electronic ballasts, ignitors and motorised lens projectors for both high beam and low beam, and
* Halogen systems using conventional bulbs.

{|
|[[File:W220_headlamps_facelift.jpg|thumb|none|Headlights on [[facelift]] vehicles.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamps_prefacelift.jpg|thumb|none|Headlights on pre-[[facelift]] vehicles.]]
|}

[[File:W220_EPC_lightning_unit.png|thumb|none|Parts related to headlamp in [[EPC]].]]

==Locations ==
=== HID Headlight Locations ===
{|
|[[File:W220_lights_front.png]]
|
* 1. LED turn signal lamp in external rearview mirror
* 2. Bixenon low/high beam - D2S 35W
* 3. Turn signal lamp - PY21W
* 4. Fog lamp - H7-55W
* 5. Parking and standing lamp W5W
* 6. Side marker lamp W5W
* 7. High beam - H7-55W
|}

=== Halogen Headlight Locations ===
{|
|[[File:W220_lights_front.png]]
|
* 1. LED turn signal lamp in external rearview mirror
* 2. Low beam - H7-55W
* 3. Turn signal lamp - PY21W
* 4. Fog lamp - H7-55W
* 5. Parking and standing lamp W5W
* 6. Side marker lamp W5W
* 7. High beam - H7-55W
|}

== Operating Lights ==

=== Exterior lamp switch ===
If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

[[File:W220_exterior_lamp_switch_arrows.jpg]]

* 0 - Off
* AUTO - Automatic headlamp mode
* Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps). Canada only: When engine is running, the low beam is also switched on.
* Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam headlamps (combination switch pushed forward).
* Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)
* Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)

If you remove the SmartKey and open the driver's door while the parking
lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on, then a warning sounds and
a bulb appears in the multifunction display with the message "SWITCH OFF LIGHTS!".

With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, the low beam headlamps cannot be switched off manually.
To activate the daytime running lamp mode, see "Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)".

'''Manual headlamp mode'''

The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch.

'''Automatic headlamp mode'''

The parking lamps, low beam headlamps and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to AUTO.

Warning: If the exterior lamp switch is set to AUTO, the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic. The headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions.

To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position AUTO with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from AUTO will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

With the daytime running lamp mode activated, the low beam headlamps will not switch off automatically.

'''Daytime running lamp mode'''

Turn exterior lamp switch to position 0 or AUTO.
When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the parking lamps will also switch on.

Canada only: When you shift from a driving position to position '''N''' or '''P''', the low beam switches off (with a three-minute delay).
For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to permit activation of the high beam headlamps.

USA only: The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior lamp switch in position 0. To activate the daytime running lamp mode, see "Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)".

'''Switching on headlamps using exterior lamp switch'''

[[File:W220_exterior_lamp_switch.jpg]]
* (1) Off
* (2) Low beam headlamps on

With the SmartKey removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not switched off.

===Turn signals===
'''Combination switch'''

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

[[File:W220_combination_switch_turn_signals_high_beam.jpg]]
* (1) Turn signals, right
* (2) Turn signals, left

To signal minor directional changes, move combination switch to point of resistance only and release. The turn signal flashes three times.

===Switching on high beams===
The combination switch is located on the left side of the steering column.

[[File:W220_combination_switch_beams.jpg]]

* (1) High beam
* (2) High beam flasher

To switch on high beams turn exterior lamp switch. Push the combination switch in direction (1).
The high beam indicator on the instrument cluster comes on.

For high beam flasher pull the combination switch briefly in direction (2).

===Switching on fog lamps===
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.

The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp cannot be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position AUTO.
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch and pull the exterior lamp switch to first or second stop.

To switch on front fog lamps make sure the low beam headlamps are switched on.
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first stop. The green indicator lamp in the lamp switch comes on.

To switch on rear fog lamp make sure the low beam headlamps are switched on. Pull out exterior lamp switch to second stop.
The yellow indicator lamp in the lamp switch comes on.

===Hazard warning flasher===
The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the starter switched on or off.
It is activated automatically when an airbag is deployed.
The switch is located on the center console.

[[File:W220_hazard_warning_flasher_switch.jpg]]

With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn,
only the respective left or right turn signals will operate when the SmartKey in the starter switch is in position '''1''' or '''2'''.

== Replacing bulbs for front lamps ==

{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_cover.jpg|300px]]
|
* 1. Headlamp cover for fog lamp
* 2. Headlamp cover for high beam halogen headlamp bulb, parking and standing lamp
* 3. Headlamp cover for Bi-Xenon (low and high beam) or halogen (low beam) headlamp bulb
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_bulb_sockets.jpg|300px]]
|
* 4. Bulb socket for fog lamp
* 5. Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp
* 6. Electrical connector for high beam
* 7. Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb
* 8. Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
|}

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://youtu.be/PZ_ylAnX_8I|320|left|Replacing Headlight bulbs video - from Masood|frame}}

|}

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0CqsoawTgLg|320|left|Replacing turn signal, parking, H7 high beam (pre-facelift)|frame}}
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KyjQragPFO8|320|left|Replacing xenon bulb.|frame}}
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_headlight_H7_highbeam_socket.jpg|thumb|none|H7 high beam socket (bi-xenon headlamp).]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_foglamp_highbeam_sockets.jpg|thumb|none|H7 high beam socket (bi-xenon headlamp).]]
|}

== Bi-Xenon headlamp ==


{|
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_location_function.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Xenon headlamp
* B - Cover
* E1 - Left front headlamp unit
* E1l1 - Left high beam solenoid
* E1n1 - Xenon headlamp control module
* E1n2 - Xenon headlamp ignition module
* E2 - Right front headlamp unit
* E2l1 - Right high beam solenoid
* E2n1 - Xenon headlamp control module
* E2n2 - Xenon headlamp ignition module
|}

The headlamps in W220 [[facelift]] differ from the previous xenon
headlamps on account of their entirely new lighting technology
development, which the xenon light uses for low and high beam lights.
The new lighting technology, known as Bi-Xenon, is located in the
outer headlamps.

When the low beam lamps are switched on the xenon headlamp
control module (E1n1, E2n1) activates the xenon headlamp control
module and ignition module (E1n2, E2n2) via the control voltage
within a few milliseconds.
A high-voltage surge from the ignition device ignites the xenon
lamps, and in doing so an electric arc is formed between the
electrodes. If an electric arc of sufficient stability is detected the
control circuit switches the control modules (E1n1, E2n1) over to
power-limiting mode.

With the bi-xenon headlamps, the light generated in the previous
manner in a gas discharge lamp (D2S lamp) travels directly
through the optical system without being reflected.

A voltage converter generates the required voltage for the reliable
function of the xenon headlamp.

For technical reasons the xenon lamp has a timed startup
characteristic. After switch on, 50 % of the luminosity is reached
within 1 to 2 seconds and full luminosity is achieved after another
approx. 30 seconds.

The entire luminous flux is made available for the high-beam lights.
When switching over to low-beam operation a screen is moved into
position between the gas-discharge lamp and the lens, which
covers up the luminous flux directed into the distance and thus
helps to prevent oncoming traffic from being dazzled.

The shield (B) is controlled electro-mechanically by the solenoids in
the right and left high beams (E1l1, E2l1).

=== Xenon headlamp control module (ballast) ===
{|
|[[File:W220_bixenon_control_module_1307329087_A2208203785.jpg|thumb|none|Module (1307329087/A2208203785) mounted.]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_control_module_1307329087_A2208203785_opened.jpg|thumb|none|Module (1307329087/A2208203785) opened.]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_ballast_connector.jpg|thumb|none|Mount point for xenon control module.]]
|}


The xenon headlamp control module (E1n1, E2n1) activates the xenon headlamp control module
and ignition module (E1n2, E2n2) via the control voltage and regulates the voltage supply
to the xenon headlamps.

The same control module is used on both sides.
The MB part number is not identified on the part, however,
the control module is ECU and MB part number can be obtained
by establishing connection to the headlamp control module using [[DAS]].

Other ballasts (e.g., 1307329072/A2038202526 from C-class) will also light up the bulb,
but may report headlamp range adjustment errors (tested in vehicle without [[ABC]]).

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2208203785
|[614/618] From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208207085
|-
|A2208207085
|[614/618] From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2208203885
|[614/618 +487] From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208207185
|-
|A2208207185
|[614/618 +487] From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2308201926
|[614/494 +-487] From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2308208426
|-
|A2308208426
|[614/494 +-487] From 30/09/2002
|}

Chinese-manufactured ballasts can be purchased on AliExpress for approximately €15.
The Chinese ballast appears to use the same components on the PCB.
However, the casing uses Phillips screws instead of Torx screws.
In addition, the Chinese version lacks the plastic PCB holder,
and the casing is missing sealant to protect against water ingress.

{|
|[[File:W220_1307329087_original_vs_chinese.jpg|thumb|none|Original vs Chinese (front)]]
|[[File:W220_1307329087_original_vs_chinese_back.jpg|thumb|none|Original vs Chinese (back)]]
|[[File:W220_1307329087_original_vs_chinese_inside.jpg|thumb|none|Original vs Chinese (inside)]]
|}

=== Xenon headlamp ignition unit ===

The xenon headlamp ignition device (1307329076/A2208204985 - EUR 100), (E1n2, E2n2) ignites the xenon lamps by means of a high-voltage surge.

{|
|[[File:W220_1307329076_A2208204985_front.jpg|thumb|none|Ignition unit 1307329076 (front).]]
|[[File:W220_1307329076_A2208204985_back.jpg|thumb|none|Ignition unit 1307329076 (back).]]
|}

A Chinese aftermarket version of the unit is available on Aliexpress for 20 EUR.
The aftermarket unit works fine, but is tighter and hence more force needs to be applied to install it.

{|
|[[File:W220_1307329076_A2208204985_original_and_chinese_clone.jpg|thumb|none|Original vs Chinese clone (front).]]
|[[File:W220_1307329076_A2208204985_original_and_chinese_clone_bottom.jpg|thumb|none|Original vs Chinese clone (back).]]
|}

=== Xenon bulb ===

The part number for xenon bulb is N910139000001.
It is D2S 35W gas discharge lamp.

While the bulbs made know manufacturers are very expensive, the HID bulbs sold on ebay have shown to be reliable.

[[File:Chinese_HID_bulb_D2S_6000K.jpg|thumb|none|Chinese D2S 35W bulbs on ebay (EUR 5 pair).]]

=== Headlamp range control (HRC) ===


Electric headlamp range adjustment is required by law for vehicles
with xenon headlamps to prevent dazzling oncoming traffic. The
headlamp range adjustment automatically keeps the inclination
angle of the low beams within the legally defined limit regardless
of how the vehicle is loaded.

The headlamp range adjustment control module utilizes the signals
from the level sensors on the front and rear axles for control and
adjustment of the low beams. The pneumatic suspension control
module processes the signals from the level sensors and transfers
these to the headlamp range adjustment control module via the data bus (CAN).
The headlamp range adjustment control module compares the
signals with the headlamp adjustment and, if necessary actuates
the headlamp range adjustment motors in the headlamps to correct the angle of inclination.

In addition to the signals from the level sensors the headlamp
range adjustment control module also processes a wheel speed
signal proportional to the vehicle speed transferred on the data bus
from the ASR/ESP control module.
Evaluation of this wheel speed signal indicates to the headlamp
range adjustment control module whether the vehicle is driving at
constant speed, accelerating or decelerating.
At constant vehicle speed the headlamp range adjustment
operates in the "static mode" with minimum headlamp motor
adjustment speed.
During acceleration or deceleration the "dynamic mode" with high
adjustment speed is actuated.

====Headlamp range adjustment control module====


{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_range_control_module.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Installation plate
* 2 - Connector
* 3 - Screws
* N71 - Headlamp range adjustment control module
|}


The control module evaluates the signals from the pneumatic suspension control
modules and ABS/ASP control modules as well as the headlamp range adjustment motors.
It actuates the headlamp range adjustment motors depending on the vehicle load,
vehicle status and position of the headlamps.

====Headlamp range adjustment motors====

The headlamp range adjustment motors in the left and right headlamps adjust the
inclination angle of the reflectors depending on the actuation by the control module.
The position of the reflectors is indicated to the control module by potentiometers in the motors.


{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_range_adjustment_components.jpg]]
|
* E1 - Left front headlamp unit
* E1m1 - Left headlamp range adjustment motor
* E2 - Right front headlamp unit
* E2m1 - Right headlamp range adjustment motor
* N71 - Headlamp range adjustment control module
|}

Both headlamps (left and right) contain headlamp range adjustment motor part number A1408201908.

{|
|[[File:A1408201908_side.jpg|thumb|none|A1408201908 side.]]
|[[File:A1408201908_connector.jpg|thumb|none|A1408201908 connector socket.]]
|[[File:A1408201908_back.jpg|thumb|none|A1408201908 back.]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_left_headlamp_range_adjustment_motor_via_socket_cover.jpg|thumb|none|Range adjustment motor observable with high beam halogen headlamp cover removed.]]
|[[File:W220_non-ABC_bixenon_headlamp_range_adjustment.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp range adjustment (vehicle without [[ABC]])]]
|}

{| class="wikitable"
! Error Code
! Generated By
! Description
|-
|B1480
|HRA - Headlamp rangeadjustment
|Component M36 (Left headlamp range adjustment motor) has Short circuit or open circuit
|-
|B1481
|HRA - Headlamp rangeadjustment
|Component M37 (Right headlamp range adjustment motor) has Short circuit or open circuit.
|}

For the last two error codes a dead motor is rarely a cause. Disconnected plug is the most common cause.

=== Washer ===
Washer (~EUR 40) for bi-xenon headlamps is A2208260791 (left) and A2208260891 (right).
Washer from the pre-[[facelift]] headlamps will not fit.
After years of use the rubber becomes fragile and breaks easily.
From the practical perspective there does not seem to be any function of this washer,
because the water is prevented from entering the headlamp with the sealing used to attach the lens to the headlamp.

{|
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_washer_left_A2208260791.jpg|thumb|none|Left washer (A2208260791).]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_washer_right_A2208260891.jpg|thumb|none|Right washer (A2208260891).]]
|}

=== Wiring ===
[[File:W220_left_bixenon_headlamp_wire_plugs.jpg|thumb|none|Plugs of Bi-Xenon left headlamp.]]

=== Part numbers ===

{| class="wikitable"
|+ U.S. vehicles with and without [[ABC]]
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2208202861
|[614+494-487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208205261
|-
|A2208203661
|[614+494+487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208205261
|-
|A2208205261
|[614+494+-487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2208202761
|[614+494-487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208205161
|-
|A2208203561
|[614+494+487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208205161
|-
|A2208205161
|[614+494+-487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-

{| class="wikitable"
|+ Vehicles without [[ABC]]
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2208202361
|[614/612] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208204361
|-
|A2208204361
|[614/612] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2208202461
|[614] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208204461
|-
|A2208204461
|[614] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-

{| class="wikitable"
|+ Vehicles with [[ABC]]
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2208203161
|[614+487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208204761
|-
|A2208204761
|[614+487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2208203261
|[614+487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208204861
|-
|A2208204861
|[614+487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|}

=== Dissecting Bi-Xenon headlamp ===

The pictures below show dissecting process of left Bi-Xenon headlamp (A2208202361 - right-hand traffic without [[ABC]]).

# Remove the metal clamps holding lens to the headlamp.
# Using the heat gun soften the sealing mastic where the lens attaches to the headlamp.
# Detach the lens slowly cutting the sealing mastic to not smear the reflectors.
# At this point the lens and reflectors can be cleaned. Use cotton wool and spirit. Touch the reflectors lightly otherwise the reflecting layer will come off.
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_remove_lens_using_heatgun.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp lens removal.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_lens_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp with lens removed.]]
|}
# Remove the reflecting and plastic ring from the xenon lamp. It is clipped on - use force. Use gloves to not damage the reflecting ring.
# The overlay reflector now can be removed.
# The transparent turn signal part of the overlay reflector is a separate part, however, it is hard to remove it without breaking the clips.
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_xenon_lamp_rings_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Xenon lamp plastic rings removed.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_overlay_reflector_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Overlay reflector removed.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_overlay_reflector.jpg|thumb|none|Overlay reflector.]]
|}
# The turn signal reflector can now be removed.
# Remove the turn signal bulb and unscrew the screw holding the turn signal reflector.
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_turn_signal_reflector_front.jpg|thumb|none|Turn signal reflector (front).]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_turn_signal_reflector_back.jpg|thumb|none|Turn signal reflector (back).]]
|}
# To remove the fog and high beam reflector, unscrew the screw holding the reflector in the bottom right corner of the reflector.
# Unscrew the reflector mount from the top left corner.
# Slide the reflector out of the bottom left mount.
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_fog_highbeam_reflector_removal.jpg|thumb|none|Fog lamp and high beam reflector removal.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_fog_highbeam_reflector_front.jpg|thumb|none|Fog lamp and high beam reflector (front).]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_fog_highbeam_reflector_back.jpg|thumb|none|Fog lamp and high beam reflector (back).]]
|}

=== Bi-Xenon headlamp for vehicles with ABC ===

The headlamp for [[ABC]] vehicles does not use the third connector to control
range adjustment motor. The motor is controlled by the
headlamp control module as can be seen in the pictures below.
{|
|[[File:W220_non-ABC_bixenon_headlamp_range_adjustment.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp range adjustment (vehicle without [[ABC]])]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_ABC_headlamp_without_reflectors_zoom.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp internal wiring (vehicle with [[ABC]]).]]
|}

== Headlamp lens ==

The headlamp lenses are not available as a separate part from Mercedes-Benz and do not have an MB part number,
but high-quality aftermarket replacements are produced by BLIC.
* right: BLIC 5410-02-0846106P (15 EUR)
* left: BLIC 5410-02-0846105P (20 EUR)
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_lens_blic_left_right.jpg|thumb|none|BLIC lens]]
[[File:W220_headlamp_lens_blic_installed.jpg|thumb|none|BLIC lens installed]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_lens_original_vs_blic.jpg|thumb|none|Original (heavily worn) vs BLIC]]
|}

== Xenon to Bi-Xenon Upgrade ==


Parts needed:
* 2 bi-xenon headlamps (various part numbers, but mine were A2208202761 and A2208202861)
* 2 5mm x .8 x 30mm bolts
* 2 5mm washers
* 2 high beam plugs (5-pin) A2205454628
* 2 wires for high beam plugs A0005403905
* 2 16 gauge U-blade wire ends for high beam wires
* 2 auto level plugs (4-pin) A0001530842
* 8 wires for autolevel plugs A0005403805
* 8 18 gauge splice couplers

Note: do the upgrade with car and lights turned off.

# Look at your new headlamps: They have 3 integrated male connector ports; a 6-pin, a 5-pin, and a 4-pin;
## The 6 pin fits your existing 6 pin female plugs on your old lights without modification. If you only connect this part of your old harness to your new lights your low beams will work, but nothing else will. You will get turn signal malfunction messages.
## The 5-pin (high beam) connector port only uses 3 pins. Pop open the plastic bulb door above this port. You will see a thick brown wire going from the bulb down to the far (driver's) side end of the port. This is true on both lights, so keep in mind the wiring on each light is not a mirror-image of the other.
## The 4-pin is your auto level. You can drive without this and the lights will work fine, but some places may outlaw xenons without auto level mechanisms.
# Assemble your wires into your 5-pin plugs: Push the female end of one A0005403905 wire into the back of the high beam (5-pin) A2205454628 plug (until it clicks into place) so that when the plug is inserted into the 5-pin port on the light, the new wire connects to the brown wire you observed in step 1. The other 2 wires in this port will not be used, so your 5-pin plug will have only one wire in it. Note the plugs are keyed so they can only be inserted one way into each light. Repeat for the other plug for the other light, noting that the wiring in the lights and therefore in your plugs cannot be mirror images of each other. Cut the male plug ends off, strip the insulation and crimp on the 16 gauge U-blade wire ends.
# Remove your old headlamps (see appropriate section below).
# Assemble your wires into your 4-pin auto level plugs: Insert the female ends of the A0005403805 wires into the back of the new (4-pin) A0001530842 plugs until they click into place. Cut off the male ends. The new plugs are labelled 1-4 next to each wire. Cut the wires to the old plug and splice them to the new wires, matching blue to 4, black to 3, red to 2, and green to 1.
# Install your new headlamps: Use the longer 5mm x .8 x 30mm bolts with washers to secure the lights.
# Insert your plugs into the lights: Attach the U-blades to a nearby chassis ground.
# If you didn't have old xenons, you will need to activate xenons using [[DAS]].

== H7 Upgrade ==

=== LED Upgrade ===
Due to the sophisticated bulb monitoring system built into the W220,
even the LED H7-format bulbs reported as "error free" will not work in W220
unless additional load resistors are installed.

=== PHIPILS Diamondvision ===
PHILIPS offers Diamond Vision 5000K white light H7 bulbs (~30 EUR/pair).

[[File:H7_Philips_diamondvision.jpg|200px]]

{|
|[[File:W220_highbeam_H7_Philips_diamondvision.jpg|thumb|none|High beam: Diamond Vision vs standard H7]]
|[[File:W220_foglight_H7_Philips_diamondvision.jpg|thumb|none|Fog lamp: Diamond Vision vs standard H7]]
|}

== Parking and Standing Lamp Upgrade ==
=== LED Upgrade ===
Due to the sophisticated bulb monitoring system built into the W220,
even the bulbs reported as "error free" may blink or burn-out quickly if
installed as replacement in W5W bulb socket.
There has been partial success (some of the bulbs have broken apart probably from the heat) using the LED bulb
shown in the picture below.

{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_parking_lamp_LED_socket_unplugged.jpg|thumb|none|Parking lamp [[LED upgrade|LED]] installation (facelift).]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_parking_lamp_LED_upgraded.jpg|thumb|none|Parking lamp [[LED upgrade|LED]] installed.]]
|}

A good close to "LED looking" effect can be achieved using OSRAM COOL BLUE INTENSE conventional W5W bulbs.
[[File:OSRAM_COOL_BLUE_INTENSE_W5W.jpg|thumb|none|OSRAM COOL BLUE INTENSE W5W bulb set]]

== Resources ==
{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JrDW0dgs5HY|320|left|Headlamp removal without removing the bumper.|frame}}
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vvzl7XZiPMg|320|left|Headlamp lens restoration.|frame}}
|}

File:W220 1307329087 original vs chinese.jpg

2025-12-20T19:03:03Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 1307329087 original vs chinese back.jpg

2025-12-20T19:02:50Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 1307329087 original vs chinese inside.jpg

2025-12-20T19:02:33Z

Pokseva:

Headlights

2025-12-20T18:52:27Z

Pokseva: /* Headlamp lens */

==Introduction - Headlight Systems==
===HID Xenon Systems===
HID stands for High-Intensity Discharge. Xenon is the type of gas inside the bulb. Xenon bulbs can produce a brighter, whiter light than a halogen car, and tend to have a longer lifespan. The bulb works in a different way to a halogen. Instead of a filament heating up and glowing, xenon headlights use electrodes to discharge the gas inside the bulb. This produces the light you see on the road. In order for xenon bulbs to work they require electronic ballasts, and ignitors to generate the high voltages required to discharge the gas.

HID xenon headlight systems come in two different types, xenon and bi-xenon.

===HID Xenon Headlight Systems===
HID '''xenon''' headlight systems use two separate bulbs for the high and low beam illumination. The main high beam system uses xenon bulbs, electronic ballasts, and ignitors. A separate conventional halogen bulb is also fitted for low beam.
===HID Bi-xenon Headlight Systems===
HID '''bi-xenon''' headlight systems use one bulb for both high and low beam illumination. To achieve low and high beam illumination with a single HID bi-xenon bulb, it is used in conjunction with a lens projector which has a solenoid/motor that is attached to a cutoff plate or shield. When the 'high beams' are activated a signal is sent to the solenoid and the motor will lower the cutoff plate/shield allowing more light to shine above the shield; hence high beams.
{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=iP4WXHmRpjs|400|center|Bi-xenon Projectors|frame}}
<br clear=all>
A pair of separate conventional halogen globes are also used to provide instant illumination and a support and backup to the bi-xenon system.

===Halogen Systems===
Halogen headlight systems use separate low beam and high beam bulbs in different locations. Sometimes dual filament bulbs are used to produce both high and low beams in one bulb. Halogen bulbs are cheap to manufacture, plus they’re very simple to replace. Inside the bulb is a filament made out of tungsten and halogen gas. The bulb lights up when electricity reaches the filament, heating up the tungsten which begins to glow. Most halogen headlamps produce a colour temperature between approximately 3200K and 5000K. The higher the Kelvin rating, the cooler and bluer the light will be.

Be careful when replacing a halogen bulb. It is popular to replace a standard halogen with an aftermarket bulb in order to achieve a white/blue tint. After market globes usually achieve this by applying a blue coating to the bulb, which the light then shines through. However, this can compromise the light output of the bulb as the blue coating can obscure the amount of light that can penetrate it. Some after market halogens are now turning to a clever xenon and halogen gas mix, which helps to produce a whiter light than the halogen gas can on its own. Be sure to use the same wattage as the original.

===LED Systems===
Modern LED bulbs are proving to be very popular as they can produce an extremely white light. They are much more efficient, due to their long lifetime and the low wattage they require to work. LED bulbs were never fitted as original equipment for W220 high or low beams. Fitting them to W220s as after market equipment poses problems due to the sophisticated bulb monitoring system built into the W220. Due to their low current draw they will be detected as blown globes and may even flash instead of producing constant light. They also need to be cooled from the back of the bulb and may require a redesign of the lens assembly.

==Description==
W220's were built with two completely different main headlight systems, namely;
* High Intensity Discharge (HID) systems using bi-xenon bulbs with electronic ballasts, ignitors and motorised lens projectors for both high beam and low beam, and
* Halogen systems using conventional bulbs.

{|
|[[File:W220_headlamps_facelift.jpg|thumb|none|Headlights on [[facelift]] vehicles.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamps_prefacelift.jpg|thumb|none|Headlights on pre-[[facelift]] vehicles.]]
|}

[[File:W220_EPC_lightning_unit.png|thumb|none|Parts related to headlamp in [[EPC]].]]

==Locations ==
=== HID Headlight Locations ===
{|
|[[File:W220_lights_front.png]]
|
* 1. LED turn signal lamp in external rearview mirror
* 2. Bixenon low/high beam - D2S 35W
* 3. Turn signal lamp - PY21W
* 4. Fog lamp - H7-55W
* 5. Parking and standing lamp W5W
* 6. Side marker lamp W5W
* 7. High beam - H7-55W
|}

=== Halogen Headlight Locations ===
{|
|[[File:W220_lights_front.png]]
|
* 1. LED turn signal lamp in external rearview mirror
* 2. Low beam - H7-55W
* 3. Turn signal lamp - PY21W
* 4. Fog lamp - H7-55W
* 5. Parking and standing lamp W5W
* 6. Side marker lamp W5W
* 7. High beam - H7-55W
|}

== Operating Lights ==

=== Exterior lamp switch ===
If you drive in countries where vehicles drive on the other side of the road than the country in which the vehicle is registered, you must have the headlamps modified for symmetrical low beams. Relevant information can be obtained at your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

The exterior lamp switch is located on the dashboard to the left of the steering wheel.

[[File:W220_exterior_lamp_switch_arrows.jpg]]

* 0 - Off
* AUTO - Automatic headlamp mode
* Parking lamps (also side marker lamps, tail lamps, license plate lamps, instrument panel lamps). Canada only: When engine is running, the low beam is also switched on.
* Parking lamps plus low beam or high beam headlamps (combination switch pushed forward).
* Standing lamps, right (turn left one stop)
* Standing lamps, left (turn left two stops)

If you remove the SmartKey and open the driver's door while the parking
lamps or low beam headlamps are switched on, then a warning sounds and
a bulb appears in the multifunction display with the message "SWITCH OFF LIGHTS!".

With the daytime running lamp mode activated and the engine running, the low beam headlamps cannot be switched off manually.
To activate the daytime running lamp mode, see "Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)".

'''Manual headlamp mode'''

The low beam headlamps and parking lamps can be switched on and off with the exterior lamp switch.

'''Automatic headlamp mode'''

The parking lamps, low beam headlamps and license plate lamps switch on and off
automatically depending on the brightness of the ambient light.
Turn the exterior lamp switch to AUTO.

Warning: If the exterior lamp switch is set to AUTO, the headlamps may switch off unexpectedly when the system senses bright ambient light, for example light from oncoming traffic. The headlamps will not be automatically switched on under foggy conditions.

To minimize risk to you and to others, activate headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch when driving or when traffic and/or ambient lighting conditions require you to do so.
In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch from position AUTO with the vehicle at a standstill. Switching from AUTO will briefly switch off the headlamps. Doing so while driving in low ambient lighting conditions may result in an accident.

With the daytime running lamp mode activated, the low beam headlamps will not switch off automatically.

'''Daytime running lamp mode'''

Turn exterior lamp switch to position 0 or AUTO.
When the engine is running, the low beam headlamps are automatically switched on.
In low ambient light conditions, the parking lamps will also switch on.

Canada only: When you shift from a driving position to position '''N''' or '''P''', the low beam switches off (with a three-minute delay).
For nighttime driving you should turn the exterior lamp switch to permit activation of the high beam headlamps.

USA only: The high beam headlamps can also be activated when driving with the daytime running lamp mode activated and exterior lamp switch in position 0. To activate the daytime running lamp mode, see "Setting daytime running lamp mode (USA only)".

'''Switching on headlamps using exterior lamp switch'''

[[File:W220_exterior_lamp_switch.jpg]]
* (1) Off
* (2) Low beam headlamps on

With the SmartKey removed and the driver’s door open, a warning sounds if the vehicle’s exterior lamps are not switched off.

===Turn signals===
'''Combination switch'''

The combination switch is located on the left of the steering column.

[[File:W220_combination_switch_turn_signals_high_beam.jpg]]
* (1) Turn signals, right
* (2) Turn signals, left

To signal minor directional changes, move combination switch to point of resistance only and release. The turn signal flashes three times.

===Switching on high beams===
The combination switch is located on the left side of the steering column.

[[File:W220_combination_switch_beams.jpg]]

* (1) High beam
* (2) High beam flasher

To switch on high beams turn exterior lamp switch. Push the combination switch in direction (1).
The high beam indicator on the instrument cluster comes on.

For high beam flasher pull the combination switch briefly in direction (2).

===Switching on fog lamps===
Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps and/or the low beam headlamps on. Fog lamps should only be used in
conjunction with low beam headlamps. Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle Regulations regarding permissible lamp operation.

The front fog lamps and rear fog lamp cannot be switched on manually with exterior lamp switch in position AUTO.
To activate the fog lamps, turn exterior lamp switch and pull the exterior lamp switch to first or second stop.

To switch on front fog lamps make sure the low beam headlamps are switched on.
Pull out exterior lamp switch to first stop. The green indicator lamp in the lamp switch comes on.

To switch on rear fog lamp make sure the low beam headlamps are switched on. Pull out exterior lamp switch to second stop.
The yellow indicator lamp in the lamp switch comes on.

===Hazard warning flasher===
The hazard warning flasher can be activated with the starter switched on or off.
It is activated automatically when an airbag is deployed.
The switch is located on the center console.

[[File:W220_hazard_warning_flasher_switch.jpg]]

With the hazard warning flasher activated and the combination switch set for either left or right turn,
only the respective left or right turn signals will operate when the SmartKey in the starter switch is in position '''1''' or '''2'''.

== Replacing bulbs for front lamps ==

{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_cover.jpg|300px]]
|
* 1. Headlamp cover for fog lamp
* 2. Headlamp cover for high beam halogen headlamp bulb, parking and standing lamp
* 3. Headlamp cover for Bi-Xenon (low and high beam) or halogen (low beam) headlamp bulb
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_bulb_sockets.jpg|300px]]
|
* 4. Bulb socket for fog lamp
* 5. Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp
* 6. Electrical connector for high beam
* 7. Electrical connector for low beam headlamp bulb
* 8. Bulb socket for turn signal lamp
|}

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://youtu.be/PZ_ylAnX_8I|320|left|Replacing Headlight bulbs video - from Masood|frame}}

|}

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=0CqsoawTgLg|320|left|Replacing turn signal, parking, H7 high beam (pre-facelift)|frame}}
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=KyjQragPFO8|320|left|Replacing xenon bulb.|frame}}
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_headlight_H7_highbeam_socket.jpg|thumb|none|H7 high beam socket (bi-xenon headlamp).]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_foglamp_highbeam_sockets.jpg|thumb|none|H7 high beam socket (bi-xenon headlamp).]]
|}

== Bi-Xenon headlamp ==


{|
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_location_function.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Xenon headlamp
* B - Cover
* E1 - Left front headlamp unit
* E1l1 - Left high beam solenoid
* E1n1 - Xenon headlamp control module
* E1n2 - Xenon headlamp ignition module
* E2 - Right front headlamp unit
* E2l1 - Right high beam solenoid
* E2n1 - Xenon headlamp control module
* E2n2 - Xenon headlamp ignition module
|}

The headlamps in W220 [[facelift]] differ from the previous xenon
headlamps on account of their entirely new lighting technology
development, which the xenon light uses for low and high beam lights.
The new lighting technology, known as Bi-Xenon, is located in the
outer headlamps.

When the low beam lamps are switched on the xenon headlamp
control module (E1n1, E2n1) activates the xenon headlamp control
module and ignition module (E1n2, E2n2) via the control voltage
within a few milliseconds.
A high-voltage surge from the ignition device ignites the xenon
lamps, and in doing so an electric arc is formed between the
electrodes. If an electric arc of sufficient stability is detected the
control circuit switches the control modules (E1n1, E2n1) over to
power-limiting mode.

With the bi-xenon headlamps, the light generated in the previous
manner in a gas discharge lamp (D2S lamp) travels directly
through the optical system without being reflected.

A voltage converter generates the required voltage for the reliable
function of the xenon headlamp.

For technical reasons the xenon lamp has a timed startup
characteristic. After switch on, 50 % of the luminosity is reached
within 1 to 2 seconds and full luminosity is achieved after another
approx. 30 seconds.

The entire luminous flux is made available for the high-beam lights.
When switching over to low-beam operation a screen is moved into
position between the gas-discharge lamp and the lens, which
covers up the luminous flux directed into the distance and thus
helps to prevent oncoming traffic from being dazzled.

The shield (B) is controlled electro-mechanically by the solenoids in
the right and left high beams (E1l1, E2l1).

=== Xenon headlamp control module (ballast) ===
{|
|[[File:W220_bixenon_control_module_1307329087_A2208203785.jpg|thumb|none|Module (1307329087/A2208203785) mounted.]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_control_module_1307329087_A2208203785_opened.jpg|thumb|none|Module (1307329087/A2208203785) opened.]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_ballast_connector.jpg|thumb|none|Mount point for xenon control module.]]
|}


The xenon headlamp control module (E1n1, E2n1) activates the xenon headlamp control module
and ignition module (E1n2, E2n2) via the control voltage and regulates the voltage supply
to the xenon headlamps.

The same control module is used on both sides.
The MB part number is not identified on the part, however,
the control module is ECU and MB part number can be obtained
by establishing connection to the headlamp control module using [[DAS]].

Other ballasts (e.g., 1307329072/A2038202526 from C-class) will also light up the bulb,
but may report headlamp range adjustment errors (tested in vehicle without [[ABC]]).

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2208203785
|[614/618] From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208207085
|-
|A2208207085
|[614/618] From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2208203885
|[614/618 +487] From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208207185
|-
|A2208207185
|[614/618 +487] From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2308201926
|[614/494 +-487] From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2308208426
|-
|A2308208426
|[614/494 +-487] From 30/09/2002
|}

=== Xenon headlamp ignition unit ===

The xenon headlamp ignition device (1307329076/A2208204985 - EUR 100), (E1n2, E2n2) ignites the xenon lamps by means of a high-voltage surge.

{|
|[[File:W220_1307329076_A2208204985_front.jpg|thumb|none|Ignition unit 1307329076 (front).]]
|[[File:W220_1307329076_A2208204985_back.jpg|thumb|none|Ignition unit 1307329076 (back).]]
|}

A Chinese aftermarket version of the unit is available on Aliexpress for 20 EUR.
The aftermarket unit works fine, but is tighter and hence more force needs to be applied to install it.

{|
|[[File:W220_1307329076_A2208204985_original_and_chinese_clone.jpg|thumb|none|Original vs Chinese clone (front).]]
|[[File:W220_1307329076_A2208204985_original_and_chinese_clone_bottom.jpg|thumb|none|Original vs Chinese clone (back).]]
|}

=== Xenon bulb ===

The part number for xenon bulb is N910139000001.
It is D2S 35W gas discharge lamp.

While the bulbs made know manufacturers are very expensive, the HID bulbs sold on ebay have shown to be reliable.

[[File:Chinese_HID_bulb_D2S_6000K.jpg|thumb|none|Chinese D2S 35W bulbs on ebay (EUR 5 pair).]]

=== Headlamp range control (HRC) ===


Electric headlamp range adjustment is required by law for vehicles
with xenon headlamps to prevent dazzling oncoming traffic. The
headlamp range adjustment automatically keeps the inclination
angle of the low beams within the legally defined limit regardless
of how the vehicle is loaded.

The headlamp range adjustment control module utilizes the signals
from the level sensors on the front and rear axles for control and
adjustment of the low beams. The pneumatic suspension control
module processes the signals from the level sensors and transfers
these to the headlamp range adjustment control module via the data bus (CAN).
The headlamp range adjustment control module compares the
signals with the headlamp adjustment and, if necessary actuates
the headlamp range adjustment motors in the headlamps to correct the angle of inclination.

In addition to the signals from the level sensors the headlamp
range adjustment control module also processes a wheel speed
signal proportional to the vehicle speed transferred on the data bus
from the ASR/ESP control module.
Evaluation of this wheel speed signal indicates to the headlamp
range adjustment control module whether the vehicle is driving at
constant speed, accelerating or decelerating.
At constant vehicle speed the headlamp range adjustment
operates in the "static mode" with minimum headlamp motor
adjustment speed.
During acceleration or deceleration the "dynamic mode" with high
adjustment speed is actuated.

====Headlamp range adjustment control module====


{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_range_control_module.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Installation plate
* 2 - Connector
* 3 - Screws
* N71 - Headlamp range adjustment control module
|}


The control module evaluates the signals from the pneumatic suspension control
modules and ABS/ASP control modules as well as the headlamp range adjustment motors.
It actuates the headlamp range adjustment motors depending on the vehicle load,
vehicle status and position of the headlamps.

====Headlamp range adjustment motors====

The headlamp range adjustment motors in the left and right headlamps adjust the
inclination angle of the reflectors depending on the actuation by the control module.
The position of the reflectors is indicated to the control module by potentiometers in the motors.


{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_range_adjustment_components.jpg]]
|
* E1 - Left front headlamp unit
* E1m1 - Left headlamp range adjustment motor
* E2 - Right front headlamp unit
* E2m1 - Right headlamp range adjustment motor
* N71 - Headlamp range adjustment control module
|}

Both headlamps (left and right) contain headlamp range adjustment motor part number A1408201908.

{|
|[[File:A1408201908_side.jpg|thumb|none|A1408201908 side.]]
|[[File:A1408201908_connector.jpg|thumb|none|A1408201908 connector socket.]]
|[[File:A1408201908_back.jpg|thumb|none|A1408201908 back.]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_left_headlamp_range_adjustment_motor_via_socket_cover.jpg|thumb|none|Range adjustment motor observable with high beam halogen headlamp cover removed.]]
|[[File:W220_non-ABC_bixenon_headlamp_range_adjustment.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp range adjustment (vehicle without [[ABC]])]]
|}

{| class="wikitable"
! Error Code
! Generated By
! Description
|-
|B1480
|HRA - Headlamp rangeadjustment
|Component M36 (Left headlamp range adjustment motor) has Short circuit or open circuit
|-
|B1481
|HRA - Headlamp rangeadjustment
|Component M37 (Right headlamp range adjustment motor) has Short circuit or open circuit.
|}

For the last two error codes a dead motor is rarely a cause. Disconnected plug is the most common cause.

=== Washer ===
Washer (~EUR 40) for bi-xenon headlamps is A2208260791 (left) and A2208260891 (right).
Washer from the pre-[[facelift]] headlamps will not fit.
After years of use the rubber becomes fragile and breaks easily.
From the practical perspective there does not seem to be any function of this washer,
because the water is prevented from entering the headlamp with the sealing used to attach the lens to the headlamp.

{|
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_washer_left_A2208260791.jpg|thumb|none|Left washer (A2208260791).]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_headlamp_washer_right_A2208260891.jpg|thumb|none|Right washer (A2208260891).]]
|}

=== Wiring ===
[[File:W220_left_bixenon_headlamp_wire_plugs.jpg|thumb|none|Plugs of Bi-Xenon left headlamp.]]

=== Part numbers ===

{| class="wikitable"
|+ U.S. vehicles with and without [[ABC]]
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2208202861
|[614+494-487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208205261
|-
|A2208203661
|[614+494+487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208205261
|-
|A2208205261
|[614+494+-487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2208202761
|[614+494-487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208205161
|-
|A2208203561
|[614+494+487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208205161
|-
|A2208205161
|[614+494+-487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-

{| class="wikitable"
|+ Vehicles without [[ABC]]
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2208202361
|[614/612] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208204361
|-
|A2208204361
|[614/612] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2208202461
|[614] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208204461
|-
|A2208204461
|[614] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-

{| class="wikitable"
|+ Vehicles with [[ABC]]
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2208203161
|[614+487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208204761
|-
|A2208204761
|[614+487] left, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|-
|A2208203261
|[614+487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002, replaced by A2208204861
|-
|A2208204861
|[614+487] right, right hand traffic. From 30/09/2002
|}

=== Dissecting Bi-Xenon headlamp ===

The pictures below show dissecting process of left Bi-Xenon headlamp (A2208202361 - right-hand traffic without [[ABC]]).

# Remove the metal clamps holding lens to the headlamp.
# Using the heat gun soften the sealing mastic where the lens attaches to the headlamp.
# Detach the lens slowly cutting the sealing mastic to not smear the reflectors.
# At this point the lens and reflectors can be cleaned. Use cotton wool and spirit. Touch the reflectors lightly otherwise the reflecting layer will come off.
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_remove_lens_using_heatgun.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp lens removal.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_lens_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp with lens removed.]]
|}
# Remove the reflecting and plastic ring from the xenon lamp. It is clipped on - use force. Use gloves to not damage the reflecting ring.
# The overlay reflector now can be removed.
# The transparent turn signal part of the overlay reflector is a separate part, however, it is hard to remove it without breaking the clips.
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_xenon_lamp_rings_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Xenon lamp plastic rings removed.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_overlay_reflector_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Overlay reflector removed.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_overlay_reflector.jpg|thumb|none|Overlay reflector.]]
|}
# The turn signal reflector can now be removed.
# Remove the turn signal bulb and unscrew the screw holding the turn signal reflector.
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_turn_signal_reflector_front.jpg|thumb|none|Turn signal reflector (front).]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_turn_signal_reflector_back.jpg|thumb|none|Turn signal reflector (back).]]
|}
# To remove the fog and high beam reflector, unscrew the screw holding the reflector in the bottom right corner of the reflector.
# Unscrew the reflector mount from the top left corner.
# Slide the reflector out of the bottom left mount.
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_fog_highbeam_reflector_removal.jpg|thumb|none|Fog lamp and high beam reflector removal.]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_fog_highbeam_reflector_front.jpg|thumb|none|Fog lamp and high beam reflector (front).]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_fog_highbeam_reflector_back.jpg|thumb|none|Fog lamp and high beam reflector (back).]]
|}

=== Bi-Xenon headlamp for vehicles with ABC ===

The headlamp for [[ABC]] vehicles does not use the third connector to control
range adjustment motor. The motor is controlled by the
headlamp control module as can be seen in the pictures below.
{|
|[[File:W220_non-ABC_bixenon_headlamp_range_adjustment.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp range adjustment (vehicle without [[ABC]])]]
|[[File:W220_bixenon_ABC_headlamp_without_reflectors_zoom.jpg|thumb|none|Headlamp internal wiring (vehicle with [[ABC]]).]]
|}

== Headlamp lens ==

The headlamp lenses are not available as a separate part from Mercedes-Benz and do not have an MB part number,
but high-quality aftermarket replacements are produced by BLIC.
* right: BLIC 5410-02-0846106P (15 EUR)
* left: BLIC 5410-02-0846105P (20 EUR)
{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_lens_blic_left_right.jpg|thumb|none|BLIC lens]]
[[File:W220_headlamp_lens_blic_installed.jpg|thumb|none|BLIC lens installed]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_lens_original_vs_blic.jpg|thumb|none|Original (heavily worn) vs BLIC]]
|}

== Xenon to Bi-Xenon Upgrade ==


Parts needed:
* 2 bi-xenon headlamps (various part numbers, but mine were A2208202761 and A2208202861)
* 2 5mm x .8 x 30mm bolts
* 2 5mm washers
* 2 high beam plugs (5-pin) A2205454628
* 2 wires for high beam plugs A0005403905
* 2 16 gauge U-blade wire ends for high beam wires
* 2 auto level plugs (4-pin) A0001530842
* 8 wires for autolevel plugs A0005403805
* 8 18 gauge splice couplers

Note: do the upgrade with car and lights turned off.

# Look at your new headlamps: They have 3 integrated male connector ports; a 6-pin, a 5-pin, and a 4-pin;
## The 6 pin fits your existing 6 pin female plugs on your old lights without modification. If you only connect this part of your old harness to your new lights your low beams will work, but nothing else will. You will get turn signal malfunction messages.
## The 5-pin (high beam) connector port only uses 3 pins. Pop open the plastic bulb door above this port. You will see a thick brown wire going from the bulb down to the far (driver's) side end of the port. This is true on both lights, so keep in mind the wiring on each light is not a mirror-image of the other.
## The 4-pin is your auto level. You can drive without this and the lights will work fine, but some places may outlaw xenons without auto level mechanisms.
# Assemble your wires into your 5-pin plugs: Push the female end of one A0005403905 wire into the back of the high beam (5-pin) A2205454628 plug (until it clicks into place) so that when the plug is inserted into the 5-pin port on the light, the new wire connects to the brown wire you observed in step 1. The other 2 wires in this port will not be used, so your 5-pin plug will have only one wire in it. Note the plugs are keyed so they can only be inserted one way into each light. Repeat for the other plug for the other light, noting that the wiring in the lights and therefore in your plugs cannot be mirror images of each other. Cut the male plug ends off, strip the insulation and crimp on the 16 gauge U-blade wire ends.
# Remove your old headlamps (see appropriate section below).
# Assemble your wires into your 4-pin auto level plugs: Insert the female ends of the A0005403805 wires into the back of the new (4-pin) A0001530842 plugs until they click into place. Cut off the male ends. The new plugs are labelled 1-4 next to each wire. Cut the wires to the old plug and splice them to the new wires, matching blue to 4, black to 3, red to 2, and green to 1.
# Install your new headlamps: Use the longer 5mm x .8 x 30mm bolts with washers to secure the lights.
# Insert your plugs into the lights: Attach the U-blades to a nearby chassis ground.
# If you didn't have old xenons, you will need to activate xenons using [[DAS]].

== H7 Upgrade ==

=== LED Upgrade ===
Due to the sophisticated bulb monitoring system built into the W220,
even the LED H7-format bulbs reported as "error free" will not work in W220
unless additional load resistors are installed.

=== PHIPILS Diamondvision ===
PHILIPS offers Diamond Vision 5000K white light H7 bulbs (~30 EUR/pair).

[[File:H7_Philips_diamondvision.jpg|200px]]

{|
|[[File:W220_highbeam_H7_Philips_diamondvision.jpg|thumb|none|High beam: Diamond Vision vs standard H7]]
|[[File:W220_foglight_H7_Philips_diamondvision.jpg|thumb|none|Fog lamp: Diamond Vision vs standard H7]]
|}

== Parking and Standing Lamp Upgrade ==
=== LED Upgrade ===
Due to the sophisticated bulb monitoring system built into the W220,
even the bulbs reported as "error free" may blink or burn-out quickly if
installed as replacement in W5W bulb socket.
There has been partial success (some of the bulbs have broken apart probably from the heat) using the LED bulb
shown in the picture below.

{|
|[[File:W220_headlamp_parking_lamp_LED_socket_unplugged.jpg|thumb|none|Parking lamp [[LED upgrade|LED]] installation (facelift).]]
|[[File:W220_headlamp_parking_lamp_LED_upgraded.jpg|thumb|none|Parking lamp [[LED upgrade|LED]] installed.]]
|}

A good close to "LED looking" effect can be achieved using OSRAM COOL BLUE INTENSE conventional W5W bulbs.
[[File:OSRAM_COOL_BLUE_INTENSE_W5W.jpg|thumb|none|OSRAM COOL BLUE INTENSE W5W bulb set]]

== Resources ==
{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=JrDW0dgs5HY|320|left|Headlamp removal without removing the bumper.|frame}}
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=Vvzl7XZiPMg|320|left|Headlamp lens restoration.|frame}}
|}

File:W220 headlamp lens blic left right.jpg

2025-12-20T18:47:57Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 headlamp lens original vs blic.jpg

2025-12-20T18:47:45Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 headlamp lens blic installed.jpg

2025-12-20T18:47:32Z

Pokseva:

Front seats

2025-12-20T17:15:27Z

Pokseva: /* Installing seat occupancy sensor emulator */ added note on type 2 emulator for facelift W220

[[File:W220_prefacelift_front_seat_crosscut.jpg|thumb|none|Pre-[[facelift]] front seat (crosscut).]]

{|
|[[File:W220_DAS_EPC_drivers_seat_1.png|thumb|none|EPC: Driver's seat: left seat]]
|[[File:W220_DAS_EPC_drivers_seat_2.png|thumb|none|EPC: Driver's seat: left seat]]
|[[File:W220_DAS_EPC_drivers_seat_3.png|thumb|none|EPC: Driver's seat: right seat]]
|[[File:W220_DAS_EPC_drivers_seat_4.png|thumb|none|EPC: Driver's seat: right seat]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W220_DAS_EPC_drivers_seat_5.png|thumb|none|EPC: Driver's seat: seat adjustment]]
|[[File:W220_DAS_EPC_drivers_seat_6.png|thumb|none|EPC: Driver's seat: coverings, fire extinguisher, first aid box]]
|[[File:W220_DAS_EPC_drivers_seat_7.png|thumb|none|EPC: Driver's seat: Front seat safety belt]]
|}

== Front seat adjustment ==
The seat adjustment switches are located on the front doors.

[[File:W220_seat_adjustment.png|300px]]

* (1) Head restraint height
* (2) Seat height
* (3) Seat cushion tilt
* (4) Seat cushion depth
* (5) Seat fore and aft adjustment
* (6) Seat backrest tilt

To adjust the seat switch on ignition or open the respective door.

'''Seat fore and aft adjustment:'''
Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow (5). Adjust seat to a comfortable seating position that still allows you to reach the accelerator/brake pedal safely. The position should be as far to the rear as possible, consistent with ability to properly operate controls.

'''Seat cushion tilt:'''
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow (3) until your upper legs are lightly supported.

'''Seat cushion depth:'''
Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow (4) until your legs are supported comfortably.

'''Seat backrest tilt:'''
Press the switch forward or backward in the direction of arrow (6) until your arms are slightly angled when holding the steering wheel.

'''Seat height:'''
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow (2).

'''Head restraint height:'''
Press the switch up or down in the direction of arrow (1).

'''Head restraint tilt:'''
Manually adjust the angle of the head restraint. Push or pull on the lower edge of the head restraint cushion.

[[File:W220_head_restraint_tilt.jpg|200px]]

'''Unoccupied front passenger seat automatic adjusting:'''
The feature below is deactivated at the factory. If you wish to have it activated, use [[DAS]].
The front passenger seat head restraint automatically lowers after a few seconds when the front passenger seat is not occupied. This improves the driver's outward view as well as the forward view from the rear passenger compartment. When the front passenger seat is occupied again, the front passenger seat head restraint returns to the last set position within a few seconds. If the front passenger seat was moved fore or aft while not being occupied, the front passenger seat head restraint returns to a position that corresponds best with the seat’s axial position when the seat is occupied again.

===Easy-entry/exit feature===
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, the steering wheel tilts upwards and the
driver's seat moves to the rear.
This allows easier entry into and exit from the vehicle when the driver’s door is
opened. However, the engine must be turned off.
When the SmartKey is inserted in the starter switch or you have pressed the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once and the driver's door is closed, the steering
wheel and the driver’s seat return to their last set positions.

You can activate the following functions:
* Steering column: Only the steering column is adjusted.
* Steering column and seat: The steering column and the seat are adjusted.

The easy-entry/exit feature can be switched on or off in the convenience submenu of the control system.

To cancel seat/steering wheel movement, do one of the following:
* Press the seat adjustment switch
* Move the steering column stalk
* Press the memory button

===Lumbar support===
For front seats basic lumbar support is available for vehicles without
option code [[Option_codes#404_-_MULTI-CONTOUR_SEAT.2C_FRONT_LEFT|404 - MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT, FRONT LEFT]],
[[Option_codes#405_-_MULTI-CONTOUR_SEAT.2C_FRONT_RIGHT|405 - MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT, FRONT RIGHT]]
and
[[Option_codes#433_-_LEFT_DRIVING_DYNAMICS_SEAT|433 - LEFT DRIVING DYNAMICS SEAT]]
[[Option_codes#434_-_RIGHT_DRIVING_DYNAMICS_SEAT|434 - RIGHT DRIVING DYNAMICS SEAT]].

On [[rear seats]] basic lumbar support is available in vehicle
with option code [[Option_codes#223_-_REAR_BACK_REST_ADJUSTMENT_AND_HEAD_RESTRAINTS.2C_ELE|223 - REAR BACK REST ADJUSTMENT AND HEAD RESTRAINTS, ELE]].

You can adjust the contour of the seat's lumbar support to best support your spine.
The thumbwheel for the driver's and front passenger's seat are located on the inner side of the seat.

[[File:W220_lumbar_support_thumbwheel.jpg]]

Make sure the ignition is switched on.
Set the lumbar support between 0 and 5.

===Electric seat adjustment (ESA) function===


Electric seat adjustment:
The driver's and front passenger's seat are electrically adjustable.
The adjustment takes place manually via the adjustment switches in
the respective door control module. The ergo-function up to 31/05/2001
facilitates the adjustment. The individual seat positions can be stored
and called up via the memory feature.

As of 01/06/2001 the ergonomics function is not used anymore for the
front seat adjustment.

If the electrically adjustable rear bench seat is fitted (special
equipment, model 220 only) the longitudinal position of the left and
right halves of the seat bench can be adjusted manually using the
adjusting switch in the respective door control module.

If electrically adjustable individual rear seats with memory are fitted
(special equipment, model 220 only) likewise the longitudinal
position and the backrest angle of the seat can be adjusted manually
using the adjusting switches in the door control module. In addition it
is possible to call up seat positions stored previously using the
memory function

Electrically adjustable individual rear seats with memory:
In addition it is possible to adjust the longitudinal position and the
backrest angle of the front seat (front passenger's seat) via the door
control module in the rear on the front passenger's side.

Entry/exit aid as of 01/09/2002 with code 275a:
With the entry/exit aid the seat control module actuates the following
control module when the key is removed:
* SAM/F (steering column)
* Overhead control panel (inside rearview mirror)
* Door control module (outside mirror)

The entry/exit aid enables the driver to get into and out of the vehicle more easily.
Before the driver gets out the steering column is moved upwards and the seat is moved back.
After getting in the position of the seat last adjusted is approached
again or the last memory position is approached.

The driving position is stored key-dependent as is the memory position.
Because of this if a key is changed a new driving position of
seat, steering column and mirrors assigned to the key is adjusted.
The entry/exit aid can be configured via the instrument cluster.
The function can be switched off completely or partially (only the steering column is still active).
On the V220 with individual rear seat system with code 275a the
adjustment of a permanently defined position of the front
passenger's and rear seat (park position) is possible from the rear
door control module.

===Adjusting front seats function===


Block diagram for front seat adjustment:
{|
|[[File:W220_Block_diagram_for_front_seat_adjustment.png|300px]]
|
* CAN-B - Passenger compartment CAN bus
* M27 - Left front seat adjustment motor group with memory
* M28 - Right front seat adjustment motor group with memory
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control module with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control module with memory
* N69/1 - Left front door control module
* N69/2 - Right front door control module
|}

Function requirements:
* No overvoltage or undervoltage
* Term.15R or 15 ON
* Respective vehicle door open

Adjusting front seats:
The positions of the left and right front seat can be adjusted manually
with the respective adjustment switches in the left front door control
module (N69/1) and right front door control module (N69/2) in the
driver's door and front passenger's door.

The following can be adjusted independently:
* The height of the head restraint
* The angle of the backrest
* The longitudinal position of the complete seat
* The position of the seat cushion
* The height of the rear half of the seat
* The height of the front half of the seat

'''Ergo function up to 31/05/2001:'''

The Ergo function up to 31/05/2001 facilitates manual adjustment.
For this the seat adjustment must be correctly normalized.

Driver side:
With the Ergo default setting, finding the right driver's seat
position and the associated adjustments of the left and right
outside mirrors, of the inside rearview mirror and steering
column is facilitated. Once the default setting is complete only
an individual fine adjustment is still necessary.

Passenger side:
On the front passenger's side finding the correct front
passenger's seat position is facilitated by the Ergo default
setting.

As of 01/06/2001 the Ergo function is not used anymore, it is replaced by
a further memory button.

'''Memory function up to 31/05/2001:'''

Using the [[Door_control_module#Memory_function|memory feature]],
previously stored driver's and front
passenger's seat positions can be approached automatically.

Driver side:
On the driver's side two complete seat adjustments can be
stored key-related and called up again. A total of eight memory
areas are available.
With the driver's seat adjustments the adjustments of the left
and right outside mirrors, the inside rearview mirror and
steering column are also stored.

Passenger side:
On the front passenger's side two complete seat adjustments
can be stored and called up again.

'''As of 01/06/2001 extended memory feature:'''

Driver side:
On the driver's side three complete seat adjustments can now
be stored and called up again for each transmitter key.
Consequently a total of twelve memory areas are available. With
the driver's seat adjustments the adjustments of the left and
right outside mirrors, the inside rearview mirror and steering
column are also stored.

Passenger side:
On the front passenger's side three complete seat adjustments
can be stored and called up again.

===Seat adjusting motors position measurement function===


Left and right front seat:
The adjustment motors of the front seats - left front seat adjustment
motor group with memory (M27)/right front seat adjustment motor
group with memory (M28) have one Hall sensor for position measurement.

Electrically adjustable rear bench seat/individual rear seats (special equipment, model 220 only):
The adjustment motors for the left rear seat adjustment motor group
(M18/1)/right (M18/2) have one Hall sensor each for position
measurement.

Position measurement:
The signals from these Hall sensors are read in by the left front seat
adjustment control module with memory (N32/1)/right front seat
adjustment control module with memory (N32/2) and rear seats
control module (N25/6, model 220 only), checked for plausibility and
counted in the internal position counter. The received Hall pulses are
evaluated as positive or negative according to the actuation voltage
of the motor. A faultless position measurement is only possible in the
normalized condition. It is a prerequisite for the ergonomics default
setting function.

===Seat calibration function===


Function requirements:
* Voltage not too high or too low
* Seat adjustment switch is not pressed.

Through normalization in the left front seat adjustment control
module with memory (N32/1)/right front seat adjustment control
module with memory (N32/2) the counter counts of the position
recognitions of the adjustment motors are linked to the actual
positions.

The normalization is a prerequisite for easy entry (model 215 only)
and the Ergo function up to 31/05/2001.

Performing normalization:
Separate normalization is required for each adjustment motor.
Normalization occurs by approaching the respective mechanical stop.
Actuation must be carried out in this position for a further 250 ms at least.

Once normalization has been carried out, the control module
must be still supplied with voltage for at least 5 seconds in
order to ensure a complete and faultless storage in the non-volatile memory (EEPROM).

The mechanical stop relevant to the respective normalization:
{| class="wikitable"
|+ Model 220
! Provision for adjustment !! Engine !! left
|-
|Seat lengthwise adjustment || M27m1, M28m1 || front
|-
|Seat height adjustment rear || M27m2, M28m2 || top
|-
|Seat height adjustment front || M27m3, M28m3 || top
|-
|Head restraint adjustment || M27m4, M28m4 || DOWN
|-
|Backrest forward/back || M27m5, M28m5 || front
|-
|Seat cushion adjustment || M27m6, M28m6 || front
|}

===Seat adjustment collision avoidance function===


Function prerequisites:
* Normalizing performed

To avoid collisions of the seat with the seat adjustment switch,
the center console, the B-pillar or the roof, the left front seat adjustment
control module with memory (N32/1) and right front seat adjustment
control module with memory (N32/2) have map controls.
In this connection when the motors are actuated the maximum range of
adjustment is restricted by means of performance maps stored in the
control module and therefore avoid the seat colliding with an obstacle.
The following possibilities of a collision can arise during seat
adjustment depending on the current seat position:

{| class="wikitable"
! Collision possibilities !! Actuation 1 !! Actuation 2
|-
| Cushion frame/Seat adjustment switch || Seat cushion angle down || Seat height adjustment down
|-
| Center console/Seat cushion || Seat lengthwise adjustment to the front || Seat cushion adjustment to the front
|-
| B-pillar Backrest || Seat forward/back adjustment to rear || Seat backrest adjustment to the rear
|-
| Roof Head restraint || (Backrest adjustment vertical) || Head restraint upwards
|}

===Blocking detection function===


The control modules constantly receive signals from the Hall sensors of the actuated motors.
These signals are evaluated for position measurement.
If the time intervals in which they enter the control module are too large
or are missing completely, blocking is recognized and after t = 2 s actuation is interrupted.
Only after the switch is released is a renewed actuation possible in this direction after t = 2 seconds.
In comparison an actuation in the opposite direction is possible immediately.

===Overload protection function===


In order to prevent an overload, the left front seat adjustment control
module with memory (N32/1)/right front seat adjustment control
module with memory (N32/2) and rear seats control module (N25/6, model 220 only)
measures the current of connected and actuated adjustment motors.
If one of the currents exceeds a threshold value dependent
on the supply voltage (I = 6.3 A - 16 A), the actuation is terminated immediately.

===Front seat adjustment control module with memory===



The left/right front seat adjustment control module with memory (N32/1,N32/2)
is located under the seat cushion of the left/right front seat.

{|
|
[[File:W220_Left_front_seat_adjustment_control_module_wit_memory.png]]
[[File:W220_Right_front_seat_adjustment_control_module_wit_memory.png]]
|
* 1 - Left/right front seat adjustment control module with memory (N32/1,N32/2)
|}



The left/right front seat adjustment control module with memory (N32/1,N32/2)
connected to the CAN bus has the following tasks :
* Control of the six servo DC motors for the front seat adjustment motor group with memory (M27,M28)
* Position recognition of these motors
* Storage of the seat position by the memory feature as of 1.6.01 expanded by one memory location
* Calling up and approaching seat positions stored previously within the framework of the memory feature
* Approaching the permanently stored seat default settings depending on the longitudinal position of the seat within the framework of the Ergo function up to 31.5.01
* Control of heated seats/seat ventilation (special equipment)
* Control of the seat belt wearing comfort function
* Monitoring of backrest locking by the left/right front seat backrest release microswitch (S91/3,S92/3), (model 215 only)

In addition the control module is used for contacting of:
* Left/right front seat belt buckle restraint systems switch (S68/3,S68/4) with AB and GUS (only USA)
* Left/right front buckle microswitch (S68/9,S68/10)
* Left side control module - passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor (B48) (right hand steering only)
* Right side control module - occupation recognition and automatic child seat recognition in front passenger's seat (B48) (left hand steering vehicle only)
* Left/right front multicontour backrest control module (N32/15,N32/16) (special equipment)
* Vehicle-sensitive seat belt lock sensor (A60), (model 215 only)
* Left /levtfront seat backrest angle microswitch group (S91/1,S92/1), (model 215 only)



The signal for the left/right front seat seat occupation is acquired by the
left/right front seat adjustment control module with memory and is
transmitted to the automatic air conditioning control and operating
module via the interior bus (CAN B).

From this information the automatic air conditioning control and
operating module increases, for example, the automatic blower level
of the ventilation depending on the number of people in the vehicle.

Furthermore, the blower capacity adjusted in the automatic air
conditioning control and operating module is read in by the left/right front
seat adjustment control module with memory in order to adapt the
seat ventilation by actuating the fans built into the seat

===Front seat adjustment motor group===

Location of front seat adjustment motor group, shown on model 220:
{|
|[[File:W220_Front_seat_adjustment_motor_group_location.png]]
{|
|
Left front seat:
* M27 - Left front seat adjustment motor group with memory
* M27m1 - Forward/back motor
* M27m2 - Rear raise/lower motor
* M27m3 - Front up/down motor
* M27m4 - Head restraint raise/lower motor
* M27m5 - Backrest forward/back motor
* M27m6 - Seat cushion forward/back motor
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control module with memory
|
Right front seat:
* M28 - Right front seat adjustment motor group with memory
* M28m1 - Forward/back motor
* M28m2 - Rear raise/lower motor
* M28m3 - Front up/down motor
* M28m4 - Head restraint raise/lower motor
* M28m5 - Backrest forward/back motor
* M28m6 - Seat cushion forward/back motor
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control module with memory
|}
|}


The six servo DC motors for adjusting the left/right front seat are actuated by the left front
seat adjustment control module with memory (N32/1)/right front seat adjustment control
module with memory (N32/2).
They have one Hall sensor each for position recognition.

==Multicontour seat function==
Multicontour seats in front are installed in vehicles with option code [[Option_codes#404_-_MULTI-CONTOUR_SEAT.2C_FRONT_LEFT|404 - MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT, FRONT LEFT]] and [[Option_codes#405_-_MULTI-CONTOUR_SEAT.2C_FRONT_RIGHT|405 - MULTI-CONTOUR SEAT, FRONT RIGHT]].

Vehicles with individual rear seats
option code [[Option_codes#224_-_INDIV.REAR_SEAT_AND_HEAD_RESTRAINTS.2C_ELEC.ADJUSTAB|224 - INDIV.REAR SEAT AND HEAD RESTRAINTS, ELEC.ADJUSTAB]]
have multicontour left/right individual rear seats.
However, compared to front multicontour seats,
the individual rear seats lack air cushions in the shoulder region.

'''Operation of front multicontour backrest'''

The multicontour backrest has inflatable air cushions built into the seat backrest to provide additional lumbar and side support.

The seat backrest cushion height and curvature can be continuously varied with switches on the right side of the seat after
turning the SmartKey in the starter switch to position '''2''' or pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button twice.

[[File:W220_multicontour_backrest_controls.jpg]]

* (1) - Shoulder region support
* (2) - Side bolster adjustment
* (3) - Massage function (PULSE)
* (4) - Lumbar region support

Make sure the ignition is switched on.

'''Shoulder region support:'''
Press "+" or "-" on switch (1). The air cushion inflates or deflates.

'''Lumbar region support:'''
Press "down" or "up" on rocker switch (4). This selects the air cushion you wish to adjust.
Press "+" or "-" on switch (4). The air cushion inflates or deflates.

'''Side bolsters adjustment:'''
Adjust the side bolsters so that they provide good lateral support using switch (2).

When the engine is turned off, the last cushion setting is retained in memory,
and the cushion is automatically adjusted to this setting when the engine is restarted.

'''Massage function (PULSE):'''
You can reduce muscle tension during long trips by periodically using the massage function.
Press button (3). The indicator lamp on button (3) comes on.
The air cushions in the lumbar region inflate and deflate rhythmically.
The massage function switches off automatically after approximately eight minutes. The indicator lamp extinguishes.

'''Multicontour seat function'''


Illustration shows multicontour seat (MCS):
{|
|[[File:W220_multicontour_seat_function.png]]
|
* 1 - Two air cushions for the shoulder region
* 2 - Two air cushions for the side region
* 3 - Three air cushions for the lumbar support region
* 4 - Operating switches
|}

The multicontour backrest of the multicontour seat enables individual
adjustment of the seat backrest by filling and venting a total of seven
air cushions. The contour and surface hardness of the seat backrest
can be adjusted independently of each other. For this (combined into
groups) two air cushions each are used for the shoulder region (1)
and the side region (2), as well as three air cushions for the lumbar
region (3). The filling and emptying of the individual air cushion
groups is controlled either manually, by means of the operating
switch (4) in the seat cushion frame of the respective seat, or
automatically by means of the multicontour backrest control module,
if the function of dynamic lumbar support has been performed.

The storage and calling up of seat backrest adjustments (air cushion
pressure values) is possible with the memory feature.
As of 01/06/2001 the switch group has a different design.
The modifications are shown in the multicontour switch section below.

===Multicontour seat control module===


The left front multicontour backrest control module (N32/15)/the right front multicontour
backrest control module (N32/16) is located under the respective seat.

The rear multicontour backrest control module (N32/14) is located under the right half of the rear seat bench.

Apart from the actuation/evaluation
electronics, pressure control valves (one for
each air cushion) are located in all control
modules of the multicontour backrests. The
air cushions are filled and emptied via these
pressure control valves.

The control module reads in the switch
conditions of the switch groups of the
multicontour backrests, detects the air
pressure in the air cushions via piezoresistive
pressure sensors, actuates the pressure
control valves and receives/sends data from/
to the respective seat control module.

{|
|[[File:W220_left_front_multicontour_backrest_control_module.jpg]]
|
* N32/15 - Left front multicontour backrest control module
* N32/16 - Right front multicontour backrest control module
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_rear_multicontour_backrest_control_module.jpg]]
|
* N32/14 - Rear multicontour backrests control module
|}


The multi-contour backrest control module is responsible for:
* Inflating and deflating the multi-contour backrest according to the control actions read in from the multi-contour backrest switches
* Control of dynamic lumbar feature, actuated with multi-contour backrest switch ''"PULSE" button''
* Sensing of actual pressure values in air cushions with piezoresistive pressure sensors
* Generating status data logs on the cushion inflation and transferring these logs to the associated seat control module via a bidirectional, serial interface.

In context with the memory feature:
* Communication with the corresponding control module via interface, particularly regarding storage and recall of stored seat positions
* Setting stored seat positions (pressure values) and other settings when the memory feature is called

===Multicontour seat switches===



The switch train for the front right (S108)/front left (S109)/rear right (S103)/rear left
(S104) multi-contour backrest is located in the corresponding seat, on the outer side of the
seat cushion frame.

{|
|[[File:W220_multicontour_seat_switch_up_to_31-05-2001.jpg|thumb|none|Front left seat up to 31/05/2001.]]
|[[File:W220_front_right_multicontour_seat_switch.jpg|thumb|none|Front right seat as of 01/06/2001.]]
|
* 1 - Switch train for front left multi-contour backrest (S109)
|}

The switch can be used for manually inflating and deflating lumbar
cushion group, side backrest cushions and also, on front seats only, shoulder cushion
group. An additional switch serves for activating and deactivating the dynamic
lumbar adjustment feature.

The switch positions are voltage-coded by means of resistors.
The coded voltages are then read in by the corresponding multi-contour backrest control module.


'''Front seat switch'''

The switch train in the left/right front seat is equipped with a rocker switch for controlling
shoulder cushion and lumbar cushion pulsation. A further rocker switch is used
to control the inflation and deflation of the two seat backrest cushions for lateral support.
A ''"PULSE"'' button is additionally available for switching the dynamic lumbar support on and off.

{|
|[[File:W220_front_seat_switch_train_up_to_31-05-2001.jpg|thumb|none|Front seat switch up to 31/05/2001.]]
|[[File:W220_front_seat_switch_train_as_of_01-06-2001.jpg|thumb|none|Front seat switch as of 01/06/2001.]]
|
* S108 - Switch train for front right multi-contour backrest
* S109 - Switch train for front left multi-contour backrest
* S108s1/S109s1 - Switch for dynamic lumbar support adjustment
* S108s2/S109s2 - Switch for seat cushion side adjustment
* S108s3/S109s3 - Switch for lumbar support adjustment
* S108s4/S109s4 - Switch for shoulder area adjustment
|}

'''Rear seat switch'''

The switch train in the left/right rear individual seat is equipped with a rocker switch for
controlling lumbar support cushion pulsation. A further rocker switch is used to control the
inflation and deflation of the two seat backrest cushions for lateral support. A ''"PULSE"'' button is
additionally available for switching the dynamic lumbar support on and off.

{|
|[[File:W220_individual_rear_seat_switch_train_up_to_31-05-2001.jpg|thumb|none|Individual rear seat switch up to 31/05/2001.]]
|[[File:W220_individual_rear_seat_switch_train_as_of_01-06-2001.jpg|thumb|none|Individual rear seat switch as of 01/06/2001.]]
|
* S103 - Switch for rear right multi-contour backrest
* S104 - Switch for rear left multi-contour backrest
* S103s1/S104s1 - Switch for dynamic lumbar support adjustment
* S103s2/S104s2 - Switch for seat cushion side adjustment
* S103s3/S104s3 - Switch for lumbar support adjustment
|}

===Adjust front multicontour seats function===


Block diagram for multicontour backrest of front seats:

{|
|[[File:W220_block_diagram_for_multicontour_backrest_of_front_seats.png|400px]]
|
* CAN-B - Passenger compartment CAN bus
* A37 - PSE control module (combined functions)
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control module with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control module with memory
* N32/15 - Left front multicontour backrest control module
* N32/16 - Right front multicontour backrest control module
* N69/1 - Left front door control module
* N69/2 - Right front door control module
* S108 - Right front multicontour backrest switch group
* S109 - Left front multicontour backrest switch group
|}

Function requirements:
* Circuit 15c or circuit 15R ON
* respective door open for t >20 s
* Multicontour backrest control module activated:

The left front multicontour backrest control module (N32/15)/right front multicontour backrest control module (N32/16) is activated when it receives an enable signal via a discrete line
from the left front seat adjustment control module with memory (N32/1)/right front seat adjustment control module with memory (N32/2).

'''Manual adjusting of the air cushion groups in the multicontour backrest'''

The switch conditions of the multicontour backrest switch group in
the left front seat (S109)/and right front seat (S108) are read in by
the left front multicontour backrest control module (N32/15)/right
front backrest control module (N32/16). As a result of this the control
module fills and empties the corresponding air cushion groups for as
long as the switch is pressed and the function prerequisites are met.
At the same time data are exchanged between the relevant control
module and the left front seat adjustment control module with
memory (N32/1)/right front seat adjustment control module with
memory (N32/2) via a discrete line so that storage and subsequent calling up of air
cushion adjustments performed manually is possible via the memory
feature.

'''Automatic adjustment of the air cushion groups in the multicontour backrest via the memory feature'''

The storage and calling up of adjustments performed manually is
triggered and controlled by the left front door control module (N69/1)/right front door control module (N69/2). To do this, the door control module exchanges information with the relevant seat control module
via CAN messages.

If this receives the request to store, the pressure values of the air
cushions conveyed from the multicontour backrest control module
are stored in its non-volatile memory. If there is a later request from
the door control module to call up memory items, the stored air
cushion pressure values are provided to the multicontour backrest
control module again. Thereupon this control module fills/empties the
air cushions as per the stored values.

As of 01/09/2002 codes 344 and 343
the left front dynamic seat control module (N32/19)
and right front dynamic seat control module (N32/22) are
responsible for the memory feature.

===Manual adjustment of air cushions in the multicontour seat===

Function requirements:
* Circuit 15R ON
* Circuit 15 ON

The air cushions of the multicontour backrest can be adjusted
manually via the right rear/left rear multicontour backrest switch
(S103, S104) and right front/left front multicontour backrest switch
group (S108, S109) in the seat cushion frame (on the outside) of the
respective seat - right rear/left rear/right front/left front. The
adjustments of the air cushions assumed for the shoulder region, the
lumbar support region and the seat backrest lateral support are
stored in a volatile memory by the left front multicontour backrest
control module (N32/15)/ and right front multicontour backrest control
module (N32/16) and rear multicontour backrest control module
(N32/14)

These values can be stored and called up again via the memory
feature in the non-volatile memory of the relevant seat control
module.

{|
|[[File:W220_front_seat_switch_train_up_to_31-05-2001.jpg|thumb|none|Front seat switch train up to 31/05/2001.]]
|[[File:W220_front_seat_switch_train_as_of_01-06-2001.jpg|thumb|none|Front seat switch train as of 01/06/2001.]]
|}

'''Manual adjustment of the shoulder region (up to 31/05/2001)'''

Manual adjustment of the shoulder region by switch for the
shoulder region (S103s4/S104s4).

For driver's and front passenger's seat only.
This provision for adjustment is not realized for the individual rear seats.

{|
|[[File:W220_manual_adjustment_of_the_shoulder_region.png|thumb|none|Manual adjustment of the shoulder region.]]
|
* A - Top half of the switch
* B - Bottom half of the switch
|}

Pressing the bottom half of the switch:
Air cushions 1 and 2 of the shoulder region are filled in sequence
from top to bottom up to the maximum pressure and then emptied
again down to the minimum pressure. The process stops as soon as
air cushion 2 is at minimum pressure.

Pressing the top half of the switch:
The air cushions are filled in the reverse order, thus from the bottom
upwards and then emptied (see above).

The transfer pressure p üb and the dwell period tv are adjustable.

'''Manual adjustment of the shoulder region (as of 01/06/2001)'''

When the rocker switch is pressed towards "+" or "-" the backrest
contour in the shoulder region is changed by filling/emptying the air
cushions.

This provision for adjustment is not realized for the individual rear seats.

'''Manual adjustment of the lumbar support region (up to 31/05/2001)'''

Manual adjustment of the lumbar support region by
the rear left/right lumbar support adjustment switch (S103s3/S104s3)
and front right/left lumbar support adjustment switch (S108s3/S109s3).

{|
|[[File:W220_manual_adjustment_of_the_lumbar_support_region_of_the_front_rear_seat.png|thumb|none|Manual adjustment of the lumbar support region.]]
|
* A - Top half of the switch
* B - Bottom half of the switch
|}

Pressing the bottom half of the switch:
Air cushions 3, 4, 5 of the lumbar support region are filled from top to
bottom up to the maximum pressure and then emptied again down to
the minimum pressure. The process stops as soon as air cushion 5
has reached the minimum pressure.

Pressing the top half of the switch:
The air cushions are filled in the sequence 5, 4, 3, so from top to
bottom and then emptied again (see above).

The transfer pressure p üb and the dwell period tv are adjustable.

'''Manual adjustment of the lumbar support region (as of 01/06/2001)'''

When the cross rocker is pressed towards "+" or "-" the backrest contour changes in the
lumbar support region by filling/emptying the air cushion which is
currently active.

When the cross rocker of the bottom half of the switch is pressed the
backrest contour in the lumbar support region is changed sequentially.
Only one air cushion is actuated actively in this process.
When the cross rocker of the top half of the switch is pressed the
sequence is the same as when the bottom half of the switch is
pressed, only in the reverse order.

===Dynamic lumbar support of multicontour backrest===

In order to prevent stresses in the back on longer journeys, the
multicontour backrest is equipped with the dynamic lumbar support
function. The function is controlled in the relevant seat by the
multicontour backrest control module. It is triggered by pressing ''"PULSE" button'' on
the dynamic lumbar support adjustment switch (S103s1/S104s1/S108s1/S109s1)
in the left rear/right rear multicontour backrest
switch group (S103, S104) and right front/left front multicontour
backrest switch group (S108, S109).

Lumbar support: curvature of spine in lumbar region.

Starting with the air cushion which is currently active the pulsation
occurs alternately in the two lumbar support cushions in the
sequence lower and upper lumbar (sequence is parameterizable).
Filling starts with the active lumbar support cushion up to the next
pressure level, unless the upper pressure level has already been
reached or exceeded. Each air pressure adjustment is held for
approx. 10 seconds before the next condition is assumed. After
approx. 8 minutes the program is terminated automatically and the
original air cushion pressures are reproduced.

Illustration shows function sequence for dynamic lumbar support:

[[File:W220_function_sequence_for_dynamic_lumbar_support.png|400px]]

First of all the three lumbar support air cushions of the multicontour
backrest are emptied. After this the center air cushion is filled in
stages up to the maximum pressure and then emptied again down to
the minimum pressure (see Figure). This process (cycle) is repeated
for a second time. After this the function is terminated by the control module.
The function can be terminated at any time by pressing the switch again.

=== Retrofitting multicontour backrest ===
Multicontour backrest option can be easily retrofitted. The only parts needed are multicontour backrest, multicontour control module and switch from the donor vehicle.
For installation instructions on [[facelift]] vehicle see the instructions below.
Installation may require to modify the fitting on the overpressure reservoir.

{|
|[[File:W220_drivers_side_seat_multicontour_backrest.jpg|thumb|none|Multicontour backrest, control module and switch for left (driver's) front seat with heating and ventilation]]
|[[File:W220_drivers_left_front_seat_without_multicontour_backrest.jpg|thumb|none|Front left seat without multicontour backrest control module]]
|[[File:W220_drivers_left_front_seat_multicontour_backrest_control_module_connections.jpg|thumb|none|Installation of multicontour backrest control module]]
|[[File:W220_drivers_left_front_seat_multicontour_backrest_control_module.jpg|thumb|none|Front seat with multicontour backrest module installed]]
|}

== Dynamic seat function ==
Dynamic seat (drive-dynamic seat) function available as of 01/09/2002
on vehicles equipped with option code
[[Option_codes#433_-_LEFT_DRIVING_DYNAMICS_SEAT|433 - LEFT DRIVING DYNAMICS SEAT]]
and
[[Option_codes#434_-_RIGHT_DRIVING_DYNAMICS_SEAT|434 - RIGHT DRIVING DYNAMICS SEAT]].


The drive-dynamic seat automatically adjusts the lateral support provided by the seat backrest to your driving style.

[[File:W220_drive-dynamic_seat.jpg]]

To activate drive-dynamic function press button (1).

The indicator lamp in the switch comes on and the following message appears in the multifunction display for five seconds:

[[File:W220_driv_dyn_seat_adj_driver.jpg]]

The drive-dynamic seat electronically controls the air pressure in the air chambers of the seat backrest side bolsters.
This function improves driving comfort and pleasure.

You can adjust the characteristics of the drive-dynamic seat using the control system.



Illustration shows Dynamic seat (FDS) as of 01/09/2002 with codes 433 and 434:
{|
|[[File:W220_dynamic_seat_facelift.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Air cushion for the shoulder region (coupled)
* 2 - Air cushion for the respective side region
* 3 - Air cushion for the upper and lower lumbar support region
|}

All the following provisions for adjustment are explained on the
driver's seat and also apply to the front passenger's seat.

The dynamic seat comprises the functions:
* Memory multicontour backrest (MMKL)
* Dynamic side support

'''Memory multicontour backrest (MMKL)'''

The multicontour backrests enable individual adjustment of the
respective seat backrest by filling and emptying up to three air
cushion groups:
* Air cushion for the upper and lower shoulder region
* Air cushion for the respective side region
* Air cushion for the upper and lower lumbar support region

The "Dynamic lateral support" function is switched on or off by
pressing the FDS ''"DYNAMIC"'' button and is controlled by the left front dynamic
seat control module (N32/19). If the function is activated, this is
displayed by an LED in the FDS ''"DYNAMIC"'' button. The left front dynamic seat
control module (N32/19) adjusts after that a corresponding basic
pressure in the lateral support cushions and, when cornering,
ensures better retention in the lateral support by temporarily adding
pressure to the lateral support cushions on the outside of the curve.
This essentially happens as a function of the instantaneous speed
and the lateral acceleration. This information comes from the traction
systems control module (N47) and is transmitted by central gateway
control module (N93) from CAN-C (engine compartment) to CAN-B
(interior). If the data for the FDS function fail for more than 2
seconds, the function is switched off and remains switched off.
The extent and speed with which the lateral support cushions for the
driver's and front passenger's seat are filled can be adjusted via the
second operating level of the instrument cluster (A1).

'''Priority sequence of the functions'''

The priorities are set in the sequence:
* Priority 1 Lumbar support
* Priority 2 Shoulder region (not for individual rear seats)
* Priority 3 Lateral support
* Priority 4 Dynamic lumbar support and dynamic lateral support (front seats only)

When pressing multiple rocker switches at the same time, only the
adjustment movement with the highest priority is executed.

'''Abort criteria'''

All functions are interrupted if there is overvoltage or undervoltage.
The relevant function is not performed if a valve has overheated or
there is a leakage fault.

'''Limit stop emptying'''

If the end point is reached after the lumbar support wave has
passed, the inactive air cushion is emptied for as long as the switch
is pressed, but for a maximum period of 1 minute.

'''Control functions'''

The adjusted specified pressures of the individual cushion areas are
controlled by the left front dynamic seat control module (N32/19) and
right front dynamic seat control module (N32/22) in each case in a
manner which is unnoticeable for the customer provided that the
function conditions for manual adjustment are met.

The contour and surface hardness of the seat backrest can be
adjusted manually via the:
* Switch group for right front multicontour backrest (S108)
* Switch group for left front multicontour backrest (S109)
* the "dynamic lumbar support" function.

'''Dynamic lateral support (driver's/front passenger's seat)'''

Function requirements:
* Circuit 15R ON
* Circuit 15 ON
* No undervoltage or overvoltage
* No overtemperature sensor
* No leakage fault in the lateral support region

Sport (stage 1): Extra pressure is applied more quickly and more intensely to the
lateral support cushions on the outside of the curve.

Comfort (stage 2): Extra pressure is applied slowly and less intensely to the lateral
support cushions on the outside of the curve.

Definitively the following control modules are involved in the dynamic seat:
* left front dynamic seat control module (N32/19)
* right front dynamic seat control module (N32/22)
* central gateway control module (N93)
* traction systems control module (N47)

'''Background functions'''

In the lumbar support region the cushions are arranged overlapping
and consequently coupled in their function during the wave
sequence. As only one air cushion is active in each case, the
adjacent cushions are considered as not active i.e. empty. The
following background functions are necessary to ensure this.

'''Idle time emptying (optional)'''

While the pressure is kept constant in the active air cushion
(residence time), the adjacent non-active air cushions are emptied.

'''Backgrounds emptying'''

If the active air cushion is emptied, then the residual pressure in the
adjacent non-active air cushions is also reduced, as soon as the air
cushions have the same pressure.

The subsequent regulation follows, for example, in the event of
pressure deviations caused by:
* The respective person sitting in or leaning on the seat
* Leakage in the seat inflators
* Temperature changes caused by heated seats, insolation, air conditioning and user warmth

Sudden changes in pressure which arise due to the person sitting in
on leaning on the seat are adjusted immediately and in a comfort-
orientated manner. The control parameters that are listed can be
programmed using diagnosis.

===Dynamic seat control module===


The left front dynamic seat control module
(N32/19) and right front dynamic seat control
module (N32/22) is located in the respective
seat backrests on the driver's/front passenger's side.
{|
|[[File:W220_Dynamic_seat_control_module_location.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Air cushion for the shoulder region (coupled)
* 2 - Air cushion for the respective side region
* 3 - Air cushion for the upper and lower lumbar support region
* N32/19 - Left front dynamic seat control module
* N32/22 - Right front dynamic seat control module
|}


Tasks:
* To fill and empty the multicontour backrest in accordance with the requirements read in by the switch
* Control of dynamic lumbar support, triggered by the multicontour backrest switch with the inscription: "PULSE"
* Control of dynamic lateral support triggered by the "DYNAMIC" switch
* Detection of the actual pressure values of the air cushions by piezoresistive pressure sensors and keeping these pressures constant
* Reading in the voltage-coded MMKL adjusting switch and the DYNAMIC switch
* Communication with the interior CAN via the respective seat control module
* Adjusting the stored pressure values when calling up the memory feature and storing the actual contours
* Cutout of the respective function if the pressure control valve responsible has overheated

===Dynamic seat switch===


The right/left front DS [FDS] switch group (S108/1,S109/1) in each case is located
under the front multicontour backrest switch group on the seat cushion.

The switch turns the dynamic lateral support function on and off.

{|
|[[File:W220_Dynamic_seat_switch.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Air cushion for the shoulder region (coupled)
* 2 - Air cushion for the respective side region
* 3 - Air cushions for the upper and lower lumbar support region
* S108 - Switch group for the right front multicontour backrest
* S109 - Switch group for the left front multicontour backrest
* S108/1 - Right front vehicle dynamic system switch
* S109/1 - Left front vehicle dynamic system switch
|}

===Manual adjustment of air cushions in the dynamic multicontour seat===
All the following provisions for adjustment are explained on the
driver's seat and also apply to the front passenger's seat.

'''Manual adjustment of the shoulder region as of 01/09/2002 with codes 433 and 434'''

Air cushions 1 and 2 of the shoulder region are coupled and are
adjusted with the shoulder region adjustment switch (S109s4).

When the rocker switch is pressed towards "+" or "-" the backrest
contour in the shoulder region is changed by filling/emptying the air
cushions.

'''Manual Adjustment of the lumbar support region as of 01/09/2002 with codes 433 and 434'''

The lumbar support region of the seat is operated by the lumbar
support adjustment switch (S109s3).
When the cross rocker is pressed towards "+" or "-" the backrest contour changes in the
lumbar support region by filling/emptying the air cushion which is
currently active.

When the cross rocker of the bottom half of the switch is pressed the
backrest contour in the lumbar support region is changed sequentially.
First, the lower air cushion is filled/emptied again and
then the upper air cushion is filled. Only one air cushion is actuated
actively in this process. This sequence starts with the air cushion
which has just become active.

When the cross rocker of the top half of the switch is pressed the
sequence is the same as when the bottom half of the switch is
pressed, only in the reverse order.
The upper air cushion is emptied first and then the lower air cushion
is filled.

===Dynamic lumbar support===

All the following provisions for adjustment are explained on the
driver's seat and also apply to the front passenger's seat.

In order to prevent stresses in the back on longer journeys, the
dynamic seat multicontour backrest is equipped with the dynamic lumbar support
function. The function is controlled in the relevant seat by the
multicontour backrest control module.
It is triggered by pressing ''"PULSE" button'' on
the dynamic lumbar support adjustment switch (S103s1/S104s1/S108s1/S109s1)
in the left rear/right rear multicontour backrest
switch group (S103, S104) and right front/left front multicontour
backrest switch group (S108, S109).

Lumbar support: curvature of spine in lumbar region.

Starting with the air cushion which is currently active the pulsation
occurs alternately in the two lumbar support cushions in the
sequence lower and upper lumbar (sequence is parameterizable).
Filling starts with the active lumbar support cushion up to the next
pressure level, unless the upper pressure level has already been
reached or exceeded. Each air pressure adjustment is held for
approx. 10 seconds before the next condition is assumed. After
approx. 8 minutes the program is terminated automatically and the
original air cushion pressures are reproduced.

Illustration shows function sequence of dynamic lumbar support as of 01/09/2002 with codes 433 and 434:
{|
|[[File:W220_function_sequence_of_dynamic_lumbar_support_code_443_434.jpg]]
|
* A - Upper lumbar support
* B - Lower lumbar support
|}

The function is controlled by the left front dynamic seat control
module (N32/19). The program is started and stopped by the
dynamic lumbar support adjustment switch (S109s1) ''"PULSE" button''. The active
function is displayed by illuminating the LED in the switch.
After the switch is pressed, first the air pressures of the air cushion in
the lumbar support region are stored by the left front dynamic seat
control module (N32/19).

==Remove/install front seat belt buckle (up to 31/08/2002)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_belt_buckle_up_to_31-08-2002_1.jpg]]
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_belt_buckle_up_to_31-08-2002_2.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Seatbelt buckle
* 2 - Bolt
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* Arrow - plug socket
|}

# Remove front seat
# Open cable straps of seat belt buckle switch cable on underside of seat
# Remove coupling (arrow) from left (N32/1) and right (N32/2) front seat adjustment control unit with memory
# Unscrew seat belt buckle screw (2) and remove seat belt buckle (1)
# Install in the reverse order

Torque specifications:
* Screw/nut on front seat belt buckle: 30 Nm

==Remove/install front seat belt buckle (as of 01/09/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_belt_buckle_as_of_01-09-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Nut
* 2 - Seatbelt buckle
* 3 - Wiring harness
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* R46 - Driver-side buckle ETR
* R46/1 - Passenger-side buckle ETR
* X28/34 - 2-pin driver seat buckle emergency tensioning retractor connector separating point
* X28/35 - 2-pin front passenger seat buckle emergency tensioning retractor connector separating point
|}

# Switch ignition off, withdraw ignition key
# Switch off engine, remove transmitter card from the vehicle (with keyless go code 889). Keep transmitter key outside transmission range.
# Remove front seat
# Unscrew nut (1) from seat belt buckle (2)
# Disconnect and expose wiring harness (3) with yellow connectors (see arrow and magnification) to left (N32/1) and right (N32/2) front seat adjustment control unit with memory and to 2-pin driver (X28/34) and front passenger (X28/35) seat buckle emergency tensioning retractor connector separation point
# Remove seat belt buckle (2) with driver (R46) and front passenger (R46/1) buckle ETR (R46) from front seat. If seat belt buckle (2) with driver (R46) and front passenger (R46/1) buckle ETR is replaced, the defective part must be properly disposed.

Torque specifications:
* Screw/nut on front seat belt buckle: 30 Nm

{|
|[[File:W220_drivers_left_front_seat_belt_buckle.jpg|thumb|none|Seat belt buckle before explosion]]
|[[File:W220_drivers_left_front_seat_belt_buckle_after_explosion.jpg|thumb|none|Seat belt buckle after explosion]]
|}

==Remove/install front seat belt (up to 31/08/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_seat_belt_front seat_pre-facelift.png]]
|
* 1 - Belt end fitting
* 2 - Upper belt guide fitting
* 3 - Automatic belt retractor
* R12/1 - Driver ETR [GUS] ignition squib
* R12/2 - Passenger ETR [GUS] ignition squib
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_seat_belt_front seat_pre-facelift_2.jpg]]
|
* 2 - Upper belt guide fitting
* 3 - Automatic belt retractor
* 4 - Bolt
* 5 - Nut
* 6 - Clutch
* R12/1 - Driver ETR [GUS] ignition squib
* R12/2 - Passenger ETR [GUS] ignition squib
|}

# Move front seat as far forward as possible with backrest upright
# Switch ignition off, withdraw ignition key
# Switch engine off, remove transmitter key from vehicle. With [[KEYLESS-GO]] code 889 keep transmitter key outside transmission range.
# [[Remove/install_paneling_on_B-pillar|Remove paneling on B-pillar]]
# Remove cover of belt end fitting (1) and undo screw
# Unscrew nut (5) from seat belt guide bracket (2)
# Release coupling on driver ETR [GUS] ignition squib (R12/1), passenger-side ETR [GUS] ignition squib (R12/2) and coupling (6)
# Remove screw (4) at automatic seat belt retractor (3)
# Remove automatic belt reel (3). Installation: Note different version (left/right) of seat belt emergency tensioning retractor and correct seating in catch. Noises from the automatic belt reel when rolling up belt are normal. The only available response to negative customer feedback regarding unacceptable noise levels is to replace the seat belt assembly with emergency tensioning retractor in its entirety. On no account should oil or grease be used to help eliminate noise. Automatic belt retractors that have been opened are no longer under warranty! If the seat belt with emergency tensioning retractor has been replaced, the defective unit must be disposed of properly.
# Install in the reverse order
# Carry out diagnosis

Torque specification:
* Belt end fitting screw: 30 Nm
* Screw/nut on front seat belt guide bracket: 30 Nm
* Screw on front automatic belt reel: 30 Nm

==Remove/install front seat belt (as of 01/09/2002)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_seat_belt_front seat_facelift.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Upper belt guide fitting
* 2 - Nut
* 3 - Cover
* 4 - Belt end fitting
* 5 - Bolt
* 6 - Bowden cable
* 7 - Bolt
* 8 - Torx screws
* A76 - Left front reversible emergency tensioning retractor [RevETR-LF]
* A76/1 - Right front reversible emergency tensioning retractor [RevETR-RF]
|}

# Move front seat as far forward as possible with backrest upright
# Switch ignition off, withdraw ignition key
# Switch engine off, remove transmitter key from vehicle. With [[KEYLESS-GO]] code 889 keep transmitter key outside transmission range.
# [[Remove/install_paneling_on_B-pillar|Remove paneling on B-pillar]]
# Remove cover (3) of belt end fitting (4) and undo screw (5)
# Unscrew screw (2) from seat belt guide bracket (1)
# Unhook Bowden cable (6) on cover plate (see magnifying glass at bottom right)
# Undo TORX screw (8, 4 pieces) on cover plate. Installation: Tighten screw (7) to torque rating.
# Undo screw (7) from cover plate. Installation: Tighten screw (7) finger-tight only to cover plate.
# Detach 6-pin coupling and 2-pin coupling (see arrows) of left front reversible emergency tensioning retractor (A76), and right front reversible emergency tensioning retractor
# (A76/1) Remove left front reversible emergency tensioning retractor (A76), and left front reversible emergency tensioning retractor (A76/1). Installation: Note different version (left/right) of seat belt emergency tensioning retractor and correct seating in cover plate. Noises from the automatic belt reel when rolling up belt are normal. The only available response to negative customer feedback regarding unacceptable noise levels is to replace the seat belt assembly with emergency tensioning retractor in its entirety. On no account should oil or grease be used to help eliminate noise. Automatic belt retractors that have been opened are no longer under warranty!
# Install in the reverse order
# Carry out diagnosis

Torque specification:
* Belt end fitting screw: 30 Nm
* Screw/nut on front seat belt guide bracket: 30 Nm
* Screw on front automatic belt reel: 30 Nm
* Bolt, emergency tensioning retractor cover plate to B-pillar: 10 Nm

[[File:W220_right_front_reversible_emergency_tensioning_retractor.jpg|thumb|none|Right front reversible emergency tensioning retractor unscrewed.]]

==Remove/install front seat belt height adjustment mechanism==

{|
|[[File:W220_seat_belt_height_adjustment_mechanism_front_seat_removal_and_installation.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Belt height adjuster
* 2 - Bolt
* 3 - Bowden cable
* 4 - Nut
|}

# Remove front seat
# [[Remove/install_paneling_on_B-pillar|Remove paneling on B-pillar]]
# Unclip Bowden cable (3) using Omega clip
# Unclip Bowden cable (3) from deflection in cable duct. Lift floor lining at left front until the deflection for the Bowden cable (3) in the cable duct can be easily accessed.
# Disassemble the Bowden cable (3) up to the belt height adjuster (1)
# Undo nut from seat belt guide bracket (4)
# Undo screw (2, 2 pieces) on belt height adjuster (1)
# Install in the reverse order

Torque specification:
* Screw/nut on front seat belt guide bracket: 30 Nm
* Screw on front automatic belt height adjuster: 25 Nm

==Remove/install front seat backrest seat-back lining==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_backrest_seat-back_lining.png]]
|
* 1 - Bolts
* 2 - Seat-back lining
|}

# Slide the front seat forwards with the longitudinal adjustment mechanism
# Slide backrest forwards with the inclination adjustment mechanism
# Unscrew screws (1)
# Pull seat-back lining (2) down and take off. Installation: slide seat-back lining into top of backrest.
# Install in the reverse order

Backrest seat-back lining is interchangeable between left and right seat backrest.
{|
|[[File:W220_seat_backrest_lining_screw.jpg|thumb|none|Seat backrest lining screw.]]
|[[File:W220_facelift_front_seat_backrest_lining_inside.jpg|thumb|none|Backrest lining of [[facelift]] front seat.]]
|[[File:W220_facelift_front_seat_with_backrest_lining_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Front seat with backrest lining removed.]]
|}

==Remove/install front seat head restraints==
Adjust head restraint so that the center of the head restraint supports the back of the
head at eye level. This will reduce the potential for injury to the head and neck in the event of an accident or similar situation.
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head restraints. Head restraints are intended to help reduce injuries during an accident.

Tilt the seat backrest to the rear for easier removal and installation of the head restraints.

[[File:W220_front_seat_head_restraints.jpg]]

'''Removing front head restraints'''

Press switch (1) upwards and hold until the head restraint is fully extended. Pull out head restraint.

'''Installing front head restraints'''
* Press switch (1) upwards and hold for about five seconds.
* Push the head restraint down until it engages.
* Adjust head restraint to desired position.

==Remove/install head restraint upholstery (up to 31/08/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_head_restraint_upholstery_up_to_31-08-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Upholstery
* 2 - Expansion element
* 3 - Housing
* 4 - Foam insert
|}

# Remove head restraint and place on suitable surface
# Completely unfold head restraint
# Remove expansion element (2). Unclip expansion element (2) at first on guide rods on opposite side, then withdraw downwards.
# Remove upholstery (1) in hinge area at left and right on housing (3)
# Remove upholstery (1) from clip groove on housing (3)
# Slide upholstery (1) on guide rods downwards and remove
# Install in the reverse order

==Remove/install headrest guide on front seat==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_and_install_headrest_guide_on_front_seat.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Headrest guide
* 2 - Head restraint
* 3 - Front seat backrest
* M27m4 - Head restraint motor, raise and lower
* M28m4 - Head restraint motor, raise and lower
|}

Remove:
# Remove head restraint (2)
# Remove tensioning element ''(seat-back lining)'' from front seat backrest
# Remove head restraint raise/lower motor (M27m4/M28m4). Push motor to right first and then remove downwards.
# Release catch at head restraint guide (1) using screwdriver. Push back catch (arrow) at head restraint guide (1) using screwdriver and pull head restraint (1) out upwards.
# Release catch at head restraint guide (1) using pulling hook. Insert pulling hook into top of head restraint guide (1), push back catch and pull out head restraint upwards.

Install:
# Insert head restraint guide (1) into backrest frame of front seat backrest (3). Do not damage backrest upholstery. Catch (arrow) must point towards rear.
# Engage head restraint guide (1) in backrest frame of front seat backrest (3)
# Install head restraint raise/lower motor (M27m4/M28m4). Insert motor facing upwards and then push to left until it engages in backrest frame.
# Fit seat-back lining to front seat backrest (3)
# Install head restraint (2)

[[File:W220_A2209700041_seat_guide.jpg|thumb|none|Head restraint guide facelift (A2209700041).]]

{| class="wikitable"
! Error Code
! Generated By
! Description
|-
|B1203
|ESA-FL - Electronic seat adjustment front left
|Hall sensor of component M27m4 (Head restraint raise/lower motor) is faulty
|}

Facelift head restraint motor A2209700026 fits both sides.

Note: due to normalization requirement, when installing new motor the new motor may be need to be moved manually to the position
of the old motor, otherwise it may be encountered that motor is not able to move the full distance.

[[File:W220_front_seat_head_restraint_motor_A2209700026.jpg|thumb|none|Facelift head restraint motor (A2209700026) removed.]]

==Remove/install front seat (up to 31/08/2002)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_up_to_31_08_2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Head restraint
* 2 - Front seat
* 3 - Cover
* 4 - Belt end fitting
* 5 - Screw
* 6 - Cover
* 7 - Screw
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_up_to_31_08_2002_2.jpg]]
|
* 8 - Pneumatic line
* 9 - Retaining clamp
* 10 - Seat adjustment mechanism
* X55/3 - Left front seat contacting strip
* X55/4 - Right front seat contacting strip
|}

# Remove head restraint (1)
# Adjust front seat (2) to front
# Remove cover (3) above belt end fitting (4)
# Remove bolt (5) from seat belt end fitting (4)
# Remove screws (7) at the back of the seat rails
# Remove covers (6) at rear of seat rails
# Position front seat (2) to rear
# Remove screws (7) at the front of the seat rails
# Remove covers (6) at front of seat rails
# Detach plug connection from pneumatic line (8) and left front seat connector block (X55/3) and right front seat connector block (X55/4) from front seat cushion. Disconnect plug connection on pneumatic line (8) with 7 mm open end wrench.
# Detach retaining clamp (9) for Bowden cable seat belt height adjustment at seat adjustment mechanism (10) in direction of arrow
# Lift front seat (2) and remove
# Install in the reverse order

Torque specification:
* Bolt to seat runner: 50 Nm (up to 30/11/2001), 45 Nm (as of 01/12/2001)
* Screw on belt end fitting: 30 Nm

==Remove/install front seat (as of 01/09/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_as_of_01_09_2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Head restraint
* 2 - Front seat
* 3 - Cover
* 4 - Belt end fitting
* 5 - Screw (Torx 45)
* 6 - Grommet
* 7 - Retaining clamp
* 8 - Pneumatic line plug coupling
* 9 - Screw (E12 Torx)
* 10 - Seat rail final cover
* 11 - Cover
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* X28/34 - Driver seat separation point buckle emergency tensioning retractor connector (2-pin)
* X28/35 - Front passenger seat separation point buckle emergency tensioning retractor connector (2-pin)
|}

# Switch off ignition, remove ignition key (vehicles without [[KEYLESS-GO]], code 889).
# Switch off engine, remove transmitter key from vehicle (with [[KEYLESS-GO]], code 889). Keep transmitter key out of transmitter range.
# Remove head restraint (1)
# Adjust front seat (2) to front. Move front and rear seat cushions all the way up. Move backrest into upright position.
# Remove cover (3) at rear side paneling
# Remove screw/bolt (5) at belt end fitting (4). Installation: When screwing on, ensure that belt end fitting (4) remains mobile.
# Remove rear screws/bolts (9) from seat rails. Remove cover (11) from seat rail.
# Turn retaining clamp (7) at Bowden cable in direction of transmission tunnel and remove
# Unhook grommet (6) with Bowden cable from bracket
# Position front seat (2) to rear
# Remove front screw/bolt (9) from seat rails. Remove cover (11) from seat rail.
# Pry off pneumatic line plug coupling (8) with open end wrench, size 7. Slightly incline seat toward rear in vehicle.
# Detach connecting coupling (see arrow) from front seat adjustment control unit with memory, left (N32/1), right (N32/2). Slightly incline seat toward rear in vehicle.
# Disconnect 2-pin driver seat connecting point buckle emergency tensioning retractor connector (X28/34), 2-pin front passenger seat connecting point buckle emergency tensioning retractor connector (X28/35). Slightly incline seat toward rear in vehicle.
# Remove seat rail final cover (10) from seat rails
# Lift front seat (2) and remove
# Install in the reverse order
# Check function of seat adjustment mechanism

Torque specifications:
* Bolt to seat runner: 45 Nm
* Screw on belt end fitting: 30 Nm

Turn retaining clamp (7) at Bowden cable in direction of transmission tunnel and remove
Unhook grommet (6) with Bowden cable from bracket


{|
|[[File:W220_front_seat_retaining_clamp_removal_1.jpg|thumb|none|Retaining clamp (7) at bowden cable]]
|[[File:W220_front_seat_retaining_clamp_removal_2.jpg|thumb|none|Turn retaining clamp by 90 degrees]]
|[[File:W220_front_seat_retaining_clamp_removal_3.jpg|thumb|none|Grommet (6) with bowden cable]]
|[[File:W220_front_seat_retaining_clamp_removal_4.jpg|thumb|none|Unhook grommet from bracket]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_SWB_left_front_seat_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Interior after left front seat removed]]
|[[File:W220_SWB_right_front_seat_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Interior after right front seat removed]]
|}

==Remove/install front seat backrest (up to 31/08/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_backrest_up_to_31-08-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Trim
* 2 - Trim
* 3 - Seatbelt buckle
* 4 - Screw
* 5 - Screw
* 6 - Backrest fitting
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control unit with memory
|}

# Remove front seat
# Remove screw (arrow) on paneling (1)
# Remove trim panel (1)
# Remove bolt (4) and remove seat belt buckle (3)
# Remove screw (arrow) on paneling (2)
# Remove trim panel (2)
## Separate pneumatic line connector for lumbar support air cushion
## Remove multicontour backrest control unit from front seat (on vehicles with driver seat multicontour backrest, code 404b and passenger seat, code 405b).
# Disconnect backrest and head restraint adjustment connector from left front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/1) and right front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/2)
# Unscrew bolt (5, 2 each) from left and right backrest fitting (6)
# Remove front seat backrest from the seat adjustment mechanism
# Install in the reverse order

Torque specifications:
* Bolt at backrest fitting: 35 Nm (up to 30/11/2001 and as of 01/12/2001)
* Screw/nut on front seat belt buckle: 30 Nm

==Remove/install front seat backrest (as of 01/09/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_backrest_as_of_01-09-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat backrest
* 2 - Stowage compartment
* 3 - Left side paneling
* 4 - Bolt
* 5 - Bolt
* 6 - Pneumatic line
* 7 - Seatbelt buckle
* 8 - Bolt
* 9 - Cover on seat belt buckle
* 11 - Bottom side paneling
* 12 - Cover on the belt end fitting
* N32/15 - Left front multicontour backrest control unit
* N32/16 - Right front multicontour backrest control unit
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_backrest_as_of_01-09-2002_2.jpg]]
|
* 10 - Electrical line
* 13 - Backrest fitting
* 14 - Bolts
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control unit with memory
|}

# Remove front seat
# Open flap on stowage compartment (2)
## Unclip stowage compartment (2)
## Remove fire extinguisher (for fire extinguisher code 682)
# Remove bolts (4, 2 pieces) on the left side paneling (3)
# Unscrew and remove bolt (see arrow) on the belt end fitting cover (12)
# Unscrew bolt (5) on the left side paneling (3) (see enlarged detail)
# Detach left side paneling (3) in direction of travel
# Unclip lower side paneling (11) in the direction of the arrow (for the multicontour backrest for the driver seat code 404b and front passenger seat code 405b).
# Remove multicontour backrest control unit on front seat (for the multicontour backrest for the driver seat code 404b and front passenger seat code 405b).
# Remove bolt (see arrow) and bolt (8) on seat belt buckle (9) cover
# Unclip retaining lug (see enlarged detail) and remove seat belt buckle (9) cover
# Expose and detach electrical line (10) from the front seat backrest (1) to the front seat adjustment control unit with memory, on the left (N32/1), right (N32/2). Installation: Ensure that routing is chafing-free.
# Remove bolt (14, 2 pieces) on the right and left side from the backrest fitting (13)
# Remove front seat backrest (1) from seat adjustment mechanism
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform function test for the seatrest function

Torque specifications:
* Bolt on backrest fitting: 35 Nm

Seat backrest leather cover is interchangeable between left and right seat.
Backrest seat-back lining is interchangeable between left and right seat.
Seat backrest frame has different code in EPC depending on the left or right seat, however, backrest rest has the same code and thus is interchangeable.

{|
|[[File:W220_drivers_left_front_seat_backrest_wiring.jpg|thumb|none|Left front seat backrest wiring.]]
|[[File:W220_drivers_left_front_seat_backrest.jpg|thumb|none|Left (driver's) front seat backrest removed. ]]
|}

==Remove/install front seat backrest cover==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_front_seat_backrest_cover_1.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat backrest
* 2 - Upholstery
* 3 - Backrest frame
* 4 - Rubberized fiber matting
* 7 - Stitching wires
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_front_seat_backrest_cover_2.jpg]]
|
* 2 - Upholstery
* 3 - Backrest frame
* 4 - Rubberized fiber matting
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_front_seat_backrest_cover_3.jpg]]
|
* 2 - Upholstery
* 4 - Rubberized fiber matting
* 5 - Upholstery clips
* 6 - Upholstery clips
|}

Remove:
# Remove head restraint guide on front seat
# Remove front seat backrest (1) (up to 31/08/2002). Place front seat backrest (1) with the covering (2) downwards on a suitable base.
# Remove driver's seat cushion (as of 01/09/2002).
# Pull covering (2) out of the insert fold (arrows) on the bottom of the backrest frame (3)
# Pull out shackle of rubberized fiber matting (4) at bottom (arrows) on backrest frame (3)
# Unhook covering (2) all-round at the backrest frame (3) (arrows)
# Disconnect connector for backrest ventilation (with front deluxe seat, incl. heated seat and seat ventilation, code 401a).
# Remove covering (2) with rubberized fiber matting (4) from the backrest frame (3)
# Remove side stapling clips (5) from the stapling wires (7)
# Release stapling clips (6), to do so rotate staple clip through 90° using flat pliers
# Pull the Velcro fabric strips off the rubberized fiber matting (4)
# Pull covering (2) off the rubberized fiber matting (4) and remove

Install:
# Insert stapling clips (6) into rubberized fiber matting (4) and straighten out
# Pull covering (2) at the top over the "head" of the rubberized fiber matting (4)
# Fold upholstery (2) to side, place on rubberized fiber matting (4) and straighten out. When replacing, draw the stapling wires (7) into the fabric sleeves in the covering (2).
# Connect longitudinal stapling wires with the stapling clips (6)
# Align covering (2) with the rubberized fiber matting (4) and fix in position at the side with Velcro fabric strips
# Hook side stapling clips (5) into the stapling wires (7)
# Insert backrest frame (3) into rubberized fiber matting (4)
# Slide shackle of rubberized fiber matting (4) (arrow) at bottom into backrest frame (3)
# Insert covering (2) all way round on backrest frame (3) and at "header piece"
# Install head restraint guide on the front seat
# Install front seat backrest (up to 31/08/2002).
# Install driver seat cushion (as of 01/09/2002).

==Remove/install front seat cushion (up to 31/08/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_driver_seat_cushion_up_to_31-08-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Screw
* 2 - Trim
* 3 - Trim
* 4 - Trim
* 5 - Cap
* 6 - Bolts
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right seat adjustment control unit with memory
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_driver_seat_cushion_up_to_31-08-2002_2.jpg]]
|
* 7 - Seat adjustment mechanism
* 8 - Seat cushion
* 9 - Screw
* 10 - Trim
* 11 - Bracket
* 12 - Bolts
* 13 - Bolts
|}

# Remove front seat
# Remove screw (1) and remove paneling (2)
# Open cap (5) and remove fire extinguisher (with fire extinguisher, code 682).
# Remove screws (6, arrows) and remove paneling (4) and cap (5)
# Pull off paneling (3) in direction of arrow. Ensure that retaining lugs are not damaged.
# Disconnect connector from seat cushion heater on left front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/1) and right front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/2).
# Remove multicontour backrest control unit from front seat (with driver seat multicontour backrest, code 404b, passenger seat, code 405b).
# Remove screw (9) and remove paneling (10)
# Remove screws (13) and remove seat cushion (8) forwards from the seat adjustment mechanism
# Remove screws (12, arrows) from the seat cushion (8) and remove bracket (11) from the seat cushion (8)
# Install in the reverse order

Torque specifications:
* Bolt, seat cushion to seat adjustment mechanism: 15 Nm (up to 30/11/2001 and as of 01/12/2001)

==Remove/install front seat cushion (as of 01/09/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_driver_seat_cushion_as_of_01-00-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Seat cushion
* 2 - Stowage compartment
* 3 - Left side paneling
* 4 - Screw
* 5 - Screw
* 11 - Bottom side paneling
* 12 - Stowage compartment retaining frame
* 13 - Paneling on belt end fitting
* N32/15 - Left front multicontour backrest control unit
* N32/16 - Right front multicontour backrest control unit
* S108 - Right front multicontour backrest switch group
* S109 - Left front multicontour backrest switch group
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_driver_seat_cushion_as_of_01-00-2002_2.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Seat cushion
* 7 - Seat adjustment mechanism
* 14 - Screw
* bl - Blue connector for fan motor
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control unit with memory
|}

# Remove front seat. Move seat cushion all the way up and to center position so that rear bolt (14) on belt buckle is accessible.
# Open flap in stowage compartment (2)
## Unclip stowage compartment (2)
## Remove fire extinguisher (with fire extinguisher, code 682).
# Unscrew bolts (4, 2 each) from left side paneling (3)
# Unscrew bolt (see arrow) at rear of paneling (13) on belt end fitting and remove
# Unscrew bolt (5) from left side paneling (3)
# Remove left side paneling (3) in direction of travel
# Unclip bottom side paneling (11) in direction of arrow (with driver seat multicontour backrest, code 404b, passenger seat, code 405b).
# Remove pneumatic lines from lumbar support control valve
# Remove connector coupling from left front multicontour backrest switch group (S109), right front multicontour backrest switch group (S108) (on driver seat multicontour backrest code 404b, passenger seat code 405b or left dynamic seat including multicontour seat code 433, right code 434).
# Remove omega clip (see arrow) from seat cushion frame
# Remove connector coupling from dynamic seat switch (on left dynamic seat incl. multicontour seat code 433, right code 434).
# Remove multicontour backrest control unit from front seat (with driver seat multicontour backrest, code 404b, passenger seat, code 405b).
# Unscrew stowage compartment retaining frame (12) from cushion frame
# Unscrew bolt (14, 2 each) and slide seat cushion (1) on seat adjustment mechanism (7) toward front. Do not yet remove seat cushion (1) from seat adjustment mechanism.
# Disconnect blue connector on fan motor (bl) (for code (401a) front comfort seat, incl. seat heating and seat ventilation).
# Remove coupling for seat cushion heater (see arrow in magnifying glass) from left front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/1), right front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/2) (for front comfort seats, incl. seat heating and seat ventilation vehicles, code 401a or right and left front seat heaters or code 873).
# Remove seat cushion (1) from seat adjustment mechanism (7)
# Install in the reverse order
# Check seat adjustment for proper function

Torque specifications:
* Bolt, seat cushion to seat adjustment mechanism: 15 Nm

Seat cushion frame is interchangeable between left and right seat cushion.
The cushion rest and cushion leather cover, however, have different part numbers in EPC depending on the side.
Passenger seat cushion has passenger occupancy sensor installed with extra connector (yellow).

{|
|[[File:W220_front_seat_cushion_drivers_side_bottom.jpg|thumb|none|Left (driver's) front seat cushion]]
|[[File:W220_front_seat_cushion_bottom_driver_and_passenger_side.jpg|thumb|none|Front seat cushion: left and right]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W220_front_drivers_seat_cushion_wires_heater_ventilation.jpg|thumb|none|Driver's seat cushion connectors: heating and ventilation]]
|[[File:W220_front_passenger_seat_cushion_wires_heater_ventilation_occupancy_sensor.jpg|thumb|none|Passwnger seat cushion connectors: heating, ventilation and passenger occupancy sensor]]
|}

==Remove/install front seat cushion covering (up to 31/08/2002)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_cushion_covering_up_to_31-08-2002_1.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Upholstery
* 2 - Cushion frame
* 3 - Rubberized fiber matting
* 4 - Upholstery clip
* 5 - Staple wire
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_cushion_covering_up_to_31-08-2002_2.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Upholstery
* 2 - Cushion frame
* 3 - Rubberized fiber matting
* 6 - Stitching wires
* 7 - Upholstery clip
* 8 - Foam wedge
|}

Remove:
# Remove driver's seat cushion. Place driver's seat cushion on suitable surface with upholstery (1) facing downwards.
# Unclip upholstery all way round (1) from clip groove (arrows) in cushion frame (2). Relieve strain on upholstery (1) by pushing down the cushion frame.
# Remove cushion frame (2) from the rubberized fiber matting (3)
# Remove side upholstery clips (4) from stitching wires (5). Pull upholstery (1) over outer edge of rubberized fiber matting (3).
# Remove upholstery clips (7, 8 pcs.) from stitching wires (6). Do this by rotating upholstery clips (7) 90° using flat nose pliers.
# Remove upholstery (1) from rubberized fiber matting (3).
# Pull stitching wires (5, 6) from upholstery (1). Only when replacing upholstery (1).

Intall:
# Slide stitching wires (5) and (6) into material sleeves on upholstery (1) and straighten out. Only when fitting new upholstery (1).
# Press in upholstery clips (7, 8 pcs.) into rear of rubberized fiber matting (3) and straighten out
# Fold upholstery (1) to side, place on rubberized fiber matting (3) and straighten out
# Use press-in tool to insert stitching wires (6) into upholstery clips (7) Installation tool for stitching wire
# Insert lateral stapling clips (4) into stitching wires (5). Pull upholstery (1) over outer edge of rubberized fiber matting (3) at side and front.
# Insert cushion frame (2) into rubberized fiber matting (3). With foam rubber wedges (8, 4 pcs.) inserted into cushion frame (2).
# Insert upholstery (1) all way round into clip groove. Relieve strain on upholstery (1) by pushing down the cushion frame. Note retaining clamps.
# Install driver's seat cushion

==Remove/install front seat cushion covering (as of 01/09/2002)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_cushion_covering_as_of_01-09-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Upholstery
* 2 - Cushion frame
* 3 - Foam padding
* 4 - Stapling clip
* 5 - Stitching wire
|}

# Remove driver's seat cushion. Place driver's seat cushion on suitable surface with upholstery (1) facing downwards.
# Unhook covering (1) from clip groove around cushion frame (2). Relieve seat cushion cover (1) tension by pressing cushion frame (2) down.
# Remove cushion frame (2) from foam rubber padding (3)
# Unhook three stapling clips (see arrows) from foam rubber padding (3) at each side. Pull upholstery (1) over outer edge of foam rubber padding (3).
# Remove stapling clips (4, 11 pcs.) from stitching wires (5). Do this by rotating stapling clips (4) 90° using flat nose pliers. Installation: Use push-in tool.
# Remove upholstery (1) from foam rubber padding (3). Installation: Align upholstery (1) on foam rubber padding (3).
# Pull stitching wire (5) out of material sleeves on upholstery (1). Only when replacing upholstery (1).
# Install in the reverse order

==Remove/install front seat multicontour backrest control module (code 404b/405b)==

{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_front_seat_multicontour_backrest_control_module.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Pneumatic line connecting rail
* 2 - Bolt
* 3 - Frame
* 4 - Overpressure reservoir
* 5 - Catch
* 6 - Control module connecting cable
* 7 - Switch group connecting cable
* N32/15 - Left front multicontour backrest control module
* N32/16 - Right front multicontour backrest control module
* sw - Black pneumatic line with diam. of 4 mm
|}

# Remove front seat
# Unscrew screw (2) and remove frame (3)
# Remove multicontour backrest, front left (N32/15) or right (N32/16)
# Expose control module connecting cable (6) and disconnect from front seat adjustment control module (see arrow)
# Expose switch group connecting cable (7) and disconnect from multicontour backrest switch group
# Open catch (5) and remove pneumatic line connecting rail (1). Open catch (5) using small screwdriver (see arrow).
# Unclip black pneumatic line with diam. of 4 mm (sw) to overpressure reservoir (4) (only if seat cushion or backrest has to be removed).
# Install in the reverse order
# Check multicontour seat backrest for proper function

==Remove/install front seat control module (up to 30/06/2001)==

{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_front_seat_control_module_up_to_30_06_2001.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat
* 2 - Internal Torx bolt
* 3 - Plug connections
* 4 - Seat adjustment mechanism
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control module with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control module with memory
|}

# Remove front seat (1)
# Disconnect all electrical connectors (3)
# Unscrew internal Torx bolts (2)
# Remove left front seat adjustment control module with memory (N32/1), right (N32/2) from bracket in seat adjuster (4)
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform function check on electric seat adjustment

==Remove/install front seat control module (as of 01/07/2001)==

{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_front_seat_control_module_as_of_01_07_2001.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Bolt
* 2 - Bolt
* 3 - Control module bracket
* 4 - Flexible shaft
* 5 - Transverse rod
* 6 - Pneumatic line
* M27m1 - Forward and back motor
* M27m2 - Rear up/down motor
* M28m1 - Forward and back motor
* M28m2 - Rear up/down motor
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control module with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control module with memory
|}

# Remove front seat
# Remove all connectors to front and rear side of left (N32/1) and right (N32/2) front seat adjustment control module with memory
# Slacken tie straps (see arrow) at control module bracket lug (3). Installation: Use new tie straps.
# Unscrew bolt (1, 2 pcs.) at front of left (N32/1) and right (N32/2) front seat adjustment control module with memory
# Unscrew bolt (2, see magnification) from rear up/down motor (M27m2, M28m2)
# Detach flexible shaft (4) from forward/back motor (M27m1, M28m1)
# Carefully release front control module bracket (3) from transverse rod (5), (see arrow) until both plastic retaining clamps on underside of control module bracket (3) have been unclipped. Control module bracket (3) is fixed to the seat frame with a rivet (see magnification).
# Unclip pneumatic line (6) at front left (N32/1) and right (N32/2) side of left front seat adjustment control module with memory
# Unclip left (N32/1) and right (N32/2) front seat adjustment control module with memory from control module bracket (3) latching lug (see arrow) at front right side
# Push left (N32/1) and right (N32/2) front seat adjustment control module with memory from control module bracket (3)
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform front seat adjustment function test

[[File:W220_drivers_left_front_seat_control_module.jpg|thumb|none|Left front seat control module (A2208205585)]]

==Remove/install front seat adjustment mechanism==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_adjustment_mechanism.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat backrest
* 2 - Driver seat cushion
* 3 - Seat adjustment mechanism
|}

# Remove front seat backrest (1)
# Remove driver's seat cushion (2)
# Remove front seat control module
## Remove front seat adjustment motor group (seat cushion) - up to 30/06/2001.
## Remove front seat adjustment motor group (seat cushion) (only for front and rear seat cushion and front seat forward and backward) - as of 01.07.2001.
## Remove front seat adjustment motor group (seat cushion) (only for seat cushion forward and backward) - as of 01/07/2001 and up to 31/08/2002, as of 01/09/2002.
# Install in the reverse order

{|
|[[File:W220_front_seat_adjustment_mechanisms_left_right.jpg|thumb|none|Front seat adjustment mechanisms: left and right]]
|[[File:W220_drivers_left_front_seat_adjustment_mechanism.jpg|thumb|none|Front left seat adjustment mechanism ([[facelift]])]]
|}

==Remove/install front seat adjusting motors (up to 30/06/2001)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_adjusting_motors_up_to_31-06-2001_1.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat
* 2 - Panel
* 3 - Panel
* 5 - Bracket
* 6 - Bolts
* 7 - Strut
* M27m1 - Forward and back motor
* M27m2 - Rear up/down motor
* M27m3 - Front up/down motor
* M27m6 - Seat cushion fore/aft motor
* M28m1 - Forward and back motor
* M28m2 - Rear up/down motor
* M28m3 - Front up/down motor
* M28m6 - Seat cushion fore/aft motor
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control unit with memory
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_adjusting_motors_up_to_31-06-2001_2.jpg]]
|
* 4 - Screw
* 5 - Bracket
* M27m1 - Forward and back motor
* M27m2 - Rear up/down motor
* M27m3 - Front up/down motor
* M28m1 - Forward and back motor
* M28m2 - Rear up/down motor
* M28m3 - Front up/down motor
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control unit with memory
|}

# Remove front seat (1)
# Undo screws (arrows) on side paneling (2)
# Remove side paneling (2) and (3) from front seat (1)
# Undo bolts (6) on seat cushion fore/aft motor (M27m6) and (M28m6) and remove motor
# Remove left front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/1), right front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/2)
# Undo bolt (4) from the bracket (5) for the left front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/1), right front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/2)
# Remove fore/aft motor (M27m1) and (M28m1). Remove screws (6).
# Remove rear up/down motor (M27m2) and (M28m2). Remove screws (6).
# Remove front up/down motor (M27m3) and (M28m3). Remove screws (6).
# Exchange coupling assignment on seat adjustment of fore/aft motors (M27m1) and (M28m1) (only for models 220.0/1 up to chassis end number 189590, when installing new fore/aft motors (M27m1) and (M28m1)).
# Undo bracket (5) for left front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/1), right front seat adjustment control unit with memory (N32/2) and the strut (7) of the motor group
# Install in the reverse order
# Check seat adjustment for proper function

Torque specifications:
* Bolt of seat adjustment motor: 4 Nm

===Exchange coupling assignment on seat adjustment===


[[File:W220_Exchange_coupling_assignment_on_seat_adjustment.jpg]]
[[File:W220_Exchange_coupling_assignment_on_seat_adjustment_2.jpg]]
[[File:W220_Exchange_coupling_assignment_on_seat_adjustment_A220589019950_with_A220589019961.jpg]]

# Detach coupling (arrow) on connector assignment.
# Using a suitable tool, slide contact retainer (1) in direction of arrow out of locked position.
# Insert unlocking tool into coupling of contact cavity 5 and remove female contact from coupling by pulling lightly on cable.
# Insert unlocking tool into coupling of contact cavity 6 and remove female contact from coupling by pulling lightly on cable.
# Exchange the female contact from contact cavity 6 with the female contact from contact cavity 5.
# During installation pull lightly on the cables in contact cavities 5 and 6 to check that the female contacts have engaged properly into the housing.

==Remove/install front seat (frame forward/back, cushion forward/back, up/down) adjusting motors (as of 01/07/2001)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_adjusting_motors_as_of_01-07-2001.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Motor
* 2 - Flexible shaft
* 3 - Bolt
* 4 - Bolt
* 5 - Seat adjustment shaft
* 6 - Wiring connector
* M27 - Left front seat adjustment motor group with memory
* M27m1 - Forward and back motor
* M27m2 - Rear up/down motor
* M27m3 - Front up/down motor
* M28 - Right front seat adjustment motor group with memory
* M28m1 - Forward and back motor
* M28m2 - Rear up/down motor
* M28m3 - Front up/down motor
|}

# Remove front seat (1)
# Unscrew screw (3, 2 pcs.) from front up/down motor (M27m3, M28m3). Only when replacing front up/down motor (M27m3, M28m3).
# Lift front up/down motor (M27m3, M28m3) slightly from transmission, kink over flexible shaft (2) and remove. Only when replacing front up/down motor (M27m3, M28m3).
# Detach seat adjustment shaft (5) from forward/back motor (M27m1, M28m1). Only when replacing forward/back motor (M27m1/M28m1).
# Unscrew screws (3, 2 pcs.) from forward/back motor (M27m1, M28m1). Only when replacing forward/back motor (M27m1/M28m1).
# Detach forward/back motor (M27m1, M28m1) from transmission. Only when replacing forward/back motor (M27m1/M28m1). Flexible shaft (2) remains in transmission.
# Unscrew screw (4) from control module bracket. Only when replacing rear up/down motor (M27m3, M28m3).
# Unscrew screw (3, 2 pcs.) from rear up/down motor (M27m2, M28m2). Only when replacing rear up/down motor (M27m3, M28m3).
# Remove rear raise/lower motor (M27m2/M28m2) from transmission. Only when replacing rear up/down motor (M27m3, M28m3).
# Detach electrical plug (6) from motor (1). Installation: Slide flexible shaft (2) into motor (1) as far as it will go.
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform function check of respective electric seat adjuster

Torque specification:
* Bolt of seat adjustment motor: 4 Nm

==Remove/install front seat (seat cushion forward/back) adjusting motors (as of 01/07/2001 up to 31/08/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_adjusting_motors_as_of_01-07-2001_up_to_31-08-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Bolt
* 2 - Side paneling
* 3 - Cover
* 4 - Belt end fitting
* 5 - Bolt
* 6 - Bolt
* 7 - Transmission
* M27m6 - Seat cushion forward/back motor
* M28m6 - Seat cushion forward/back motor
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control unit with memory
* vi - Violet coupling
|}

# Move front seats toward front. Move front and back seat cushions up as far as possible.
# Remove cover (3) from side trim (2)
# Unscrew screw (5) from belt end fitting (4). Installation: When screwing on, please ensure that the belt end fitting (4) remains mobile.
# Unscrew bolt (1) and unclip and remove upper trim (2)
# Unscrew screws (6, 2 screws) from seat cushion forward/back motor (M27m6, M28m6)
# Remove seat cushion forward/back motor (M27m6, M28m6) from transmission (7). Shaft remains in transmission (7). Installation: Motor must be inserted into pilot stud (arrows).
# Unclip connecting cable to underside of left (N32/1) and right (N32/2) front seat adjustment control unit with memory. Installation: Carefully clip connecting cable into retaining clamps on underside of control unit.
# Unplug violet coupling (vi) from left (N32/1) and right (N32/2) front seat adjustment control unit with memory
# Remove seat cushion forward/back motor (M27m6, M28m6) with connecting cable
# Install in the reverse order
# Check seat adjustment for proper function

Torque specification:
* Bolt of seat adjustment motor: 4 Nm
* Screw/nut on front seat belt buckle: 30 Nm

==Remove/install front seat (seat cushion forward/back) adjusting motors (as of 01/09/2002)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_adjusting_motors_as_of_01-09-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat
* 2 - Stowage compartment
* 3 - Cover
* 4 - Belt end fitting
* 5 - Bolt
* 6 - Bolt
* 7 - Bolt
* 12 - Left side paneling
* 13 - Rear side trim
* M27m6 - Seat cushion forward/back motor
* M28m6 - Seat cushion forward/back motor
|}

# Adjust front seat (1) to front. Move front and back seat cushions up as far as possible.
# Remove cover (3) from rear side trim (13)
# Unscrew screw (5) from belt end fitting (4). Installation: When screwing on, please ensure that the belt end fitting (4) remains mobile.
# Remove screw (see arrow) from rear side trim (13)
# Unscrew screw (6, see magnification) from left side trim (12)
# Open stowage compartment flap (2)
## Unclip and remove stowage compartment (2)
## Remove fire extinguisher (for vehicles with fire extinguisher code 682)
# Unscrew screws (6, 2 screws) from left side trim (12)
# Pull off left side trim (12) in direction of travel
# Unscrew screw (7, 2 screws) from seat cushion forward/back motor (M27m6, M28m6)
# Remove seat cushion forward/back motor (M27m6, M28m6) from transmission. Shaft remains in transmission.
# Unplug connector from seat cushion forward/back motor (M27m6, M28m6)
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform function check of seat cushion forward/back facility

Torque specification:
* Bolt of seat adjustment motor: 4 Nm
* Screw/nut on front seat belt buckle: 30 Nm

==Remove/install front seat (backrest and head restraint) adjusting motors==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_backrest_and_head_restraint_adjusting_motors.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Upholstery
* 2 - Head restraint wiring harness
* 3 - Bolt
* 7 - Seat belt buckle
* 8 - Bolt
* 9 - Side paneling
* 10 - Wiring harness
* M27m4 - Head restraint motor, up and down
* M27m5 - Backrest forward/back motor
* M28m4 - Head restraint up/down motor
* M28m5 - Backrest forward/back motor
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control module with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control module with memory
|}

# Remove front seat
# Remove seat-back lining from seat backrest
# Remove head restraint up/down motor (M27m4/M28m4). Only when replacing. First press head restraint up/down motor (M27m4/M28m4) to right side and then remove downward.
# Expose upholstery (1) around backrest forward/back motor (M27m5, M28m5) (see arrow)
# Remove side paneling (9) from seat belt buckle (7). Screws (8, arrow) and retaining clip (see detail).
# Disconnect head restraint wiring harness (2) from head restraint up/down motor (M27m4, M28m4). Head restraint wiring harness (2) and wiring harness (10) are connected together with the backrest forward/back motor (M27m5, M28m5).
# Expose head restraint wiring harness (2) at right side of backrest frame
# Expose wiring harness (1) of left (N32/1), right (N32/2) front seat adjustment control module with memory as far as backrest forward/back motor (M27m5, M28m5). Installation: Fix wiring harness (10) to existing cables using tie straps.
# Unscrew screw (3) from right backrest frame and pull backrest forward/back motor (M27m5, M28m5) out towards rear
# Install in the reverse order
# Check seat adjustment for proper function

Torque specifications:
* Bolt, backrest adjustment motor: 5 Nm

==Remove/install front seat blower regulator for seat ventilation motors (code 401)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_blower_regulator_for_seat_ventilation_motors_in_front_seat.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat backrest
* 2 - Backrest frame
* 3 - Backrest cover
* 4 - Bolt
* 5 - Connector
* N29/5 - Left front seat ventilation blower regulator
* N29/6 - Right front seat ventilation blower regulator
|}

# Remove tensioning element (''front seat backrest seat-back lining'') from front seat backrest (1)
# Detach backrest upholstery (3) from backrest frame (2)
# Disconnect connector (5) from left (N29/5) and right (N29/6) front seat ventilators
# Unscrew bolt (4) and remove left (N29/5) and right (N29/6) front seat ventilator blower regulator
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform seat ventilation function test

==Remove/install front seat cushion ventilation motors (code 401)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_cushion_ventilation_motors.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Driver seat cushion
* 2 - Seat cushion cover
* 3 - Rubberized matting/foamed material surface
* M18/9 - Left front seat cushion ventilation motor group
* M18/11 - Right front seat cushion ventilation motor group
|}

# Remove driver's seat cushion (1)
# Remove cover of front seat cushion
# Remove defective front left (M18/9) and right (M18/11) seat cushion ventilation motor group together with rubberized fiber matting/foam rubber (3). Individual motors are not replaced - the entire motor group with rubberized fiber matting/foam rubber (3) is replaced.
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform seat ventilation function check

==Remove/install front seat backrest ventilation motors==

{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_the_seat_ventilation_motors_on_the_front_seat_backrest.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat backrest
* 2 - Backrest cover
* 3 - Rubberized fiber matting
* M18/10 - Left front seat backrest ventilation motor group
* M18/12 - Right front seat backrest ventilation motor group
|}

# Remove covering on front seat backrest
# Remove defective front left (M18/10) and right (M18/12) seat backrest ventilation motor group together with rubberized fiber matting (3). Individual motors are not replaced - the entire motor group with rubberized fiber matting (3) is replaced.
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform seat ventilation function check

==Remove/install front seat multicontour backrest control switch (code 404/405) (up to 31/08/2002)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_multicontour_backrest_control_switch_up_to_31-08-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Paneling
* 2 - Assembly wedge
* S108 - Right front multicontour backrest switch group
* S109 - Left front multicontour backrest switch group
|}

# Unclip front right (S108), left (S109) multicontour backrest switch group out of front seat paneling (1) with assembly wedge (2)
# Disconnect electrical connector
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform multicontour backrest function check

==Remove/install front seat multicontour backrest control switch (code 404/405) (as of 01/09/2002)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_seat_multicontour_backrest_control_switch_as_of_01-09-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Electrical connecting cable
* 2 - Cover
* S108 - Right front multicontour backrest switch group
* S109 - Left front multicontour backrest switch group
|}

# Drive front seat backwards. Move seat cushion upwards as far as possible.
# Push front right (S108), left (S109) multicontour backrest switch group out of cover (2). Move hand beneath cover (2) and push switch group out.
# Detach electrical connecting cable. Omega clip may need to be removed from seat cushion frame (see arrow).
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform function test of front right (S108), left (S109) multicontour backrest switch group

==Remove/install multicontour backrest center air cushion (code 404/405)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_multi-contour_backrest_air_cushion.jpg]]
|
* 5 - T-piece
* 6 - Center air cushion
* 7 - Side air cushion
* 8 - Pneumatic line
* 9 - Seat frame
* 10 - Reinforcement plate
|}

# Remove driver's seat cushion
# Remove covering on front seat backrest. Only remove backrest covering with rubberized fiber matting from backrest frame
# Pull off all pneumatic line from the T-piece (5, see enlarged section) on the back of the center air cushion (6)
# Pull all pneumatic lines out of the tongues on the back of the center air cushion (6)
# Pull strip of adhesive tape on the top part of the center air cushion (6) off the backrest frame. Installation: Fasten the upper air cushion of the center air cushion (6) with strip of adhesive tape so that they cannot fold down.
# Unfold lower tongues (see arrows) of the reinforcement plate (10) downwards out of the backrest frame. Installation: Secure tongues after turning around on grid.
# Press out the corners (see arrow, top) of the reinforcement plate (10) on the right and left next to the head restraint guides. Do not damage the corners of the reinforcement plate (10). Installation: The upper retainer tabs (see arrow, bottom) of the reinforcement plate (10) must be guided into the second grid brace from above.
# Detach pneumatic lines (8) from seat frame (9) and re-convert up to the center air cushion (6). Ensure that it cannot chafe. Installation: Fasten the pneumatic lines (8) to the seat frame (9) with a tie strap (see arrow).
# Pull center air cushion (6) upwards off the backrest frame
# Install in the reverse order
# Carry out function check of multicontour backrest

==Remove/install multicontour backrest side air cushions (code 404/405)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_multicontour_backrest_side_air_cushions.jpg]]
|
* 2 - Backrest frame
* 5 - T-piece
* 7 - Side air cushion
* 10 - Bolt
* 11 - Retaining strap
* 12 - Bracket
|}

# Remove driver's seat cushion
# Remove covering on front seat backrest. Only remove backrest upholstery with rubberized fiber matting from front seat backrest.
# Detach pneumatic line for side air cushion (7) from T-piece (5) at rear of center air cushion (see magnifying glass)
# Pull pneumatic line out of tab on rear of center air cushion
# Undo both tensioning straps (11) around side air cushion (7) from backrest frame (2)
# Unscrew screw (10) from backrest frame (2)
# Push bracket (12) with side air cushion (7) upwards and remove
# Slacken retaining straps (11) on bracket (12)
# Pull side air cushion (7) from bracket (12) and remove
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform multicontour backrest function check

==Remove/install front seat backrest frame overpressure reservoir==

{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_backrest_frame_overpressure_reservoir.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat
* 2 - Pneumatic connecting line
* 3 - Overpressure reservoir
* 4 - Cushion frame
|}

# Remove front seat (1)
# Removing multicontour backrest control module from front seat (with driver seat multicontour backrest code 404b, passenger seat code 405b).
# Detach pneumatic connecting line (2) from overpressure reservoir (3)
# Push overpressure reservoir (3) from cushion frame (4) using assembly wedge. Installation: When installing the overpressure reservoir (3), ensure that the retaining clamp engages in the hole in the cushion frame.
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform function check of lumbar support or multicontour backrest

[[File:W220_front_seat_overpressure_reservoir.jpg|thumb|none|Front seat overpressure reservoir]]

==Remove/install front seat backrest lumbar support air cushion (except code 404/405/433/434)==

Shown on vehicle without front luxury seat, incl. heated seat and seat ventilation, code 401a:
{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_lumbar_support_air_cushion_from_front_seat_backrest.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Front seat backrest
* 2 - Backrest cover
* 3 - Backrest frame
* 4 - Rubberized fiber matting
* 5 - Reinforcement plate
* M27m4 - Head restraint motor, raise and lower
* M28m4 - Head restraint motor, raise and lower
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_lumbar_support_reinforcement_plate_and_air_cushion.jpg]]
|
* 5 - Reinforcement plate
* 6 - Air cushion
|}

# Remove front seat backrest (1)
# Remove tensioning element (''seat backrest seat-back lining'') from front seat backrest
# Remove head restraint raise/lower motor (M27m4/M28m4). Push motor to right first and then remove downwards.
# Place front seat backrest (1) onto a suitable underlay with the backrest cover (2) facing downwards
# Pull backrest upholstery (2) out of clip groove (arrows) at bottom of backrest frame (3)
# Pull out rubberized fiber matting (4) lug (arrows) at bottom of backrest frame (3)
# Detach lugs on reinforcement plate (5) from spring wire of backrest frame (3). Do not damage lugs.
# Pull reinforcement plate (5) with air cushion (6) out of backrest frame (3). Lift backrest frame (3) with spring wire from backrest upholstery (2) with rubberized fiber matting (4).
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform lumbar support function check

==Remove/install front seat backrest lumbar support control valve==


{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_lumbar_support_control_valve_from_front_seat_backrest.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Control valve
* 2 - Paneling
* 3 - Assembly wedge
|}

With model refinement 2003 (as of 01/09/2002)
the position of the control valve (1) has been
changed to the inboard side of the seat.

# Unclip control valve (1) with assembly wedge (3) from front seat paneling (2)
# Detach pneumatic line and disconnect pneumatic connector. Pay attention to line routing.
# Install in the reverse order
# Perform lumbar support function check

==Front passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor (B48)==

{|
|[[File:W220_Front_Seat_Occupant_Sensor_A2208211681.jpg|thumb|none|Seat occupant sensor (A2208211681)]]
|[[File:W220_Front_Seat_Occupant_Sensor_module_A2208211681.jpg|thumb|none|Occupant sensor module (A2208211681)]]
|}

If the SRS indicator and warning lamp stays on or comes on intermittently a possible cause is that the passenger seat occupancy sensor (also known as weight sensor or SRS sensor mat) is faulty or failing.

{| class="wikitable"
! Error Code
! Generated By
! Description
|-
|9028
|AB - Airbag
|The coding for component B48 (Front passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition) is faulty.
|}

There are four options to fix the SRS indicator and warning lamp staying on:
# Replace the front passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor (B48). The sensor costs around EUR 480 and its replacement involves dissecting seat cushion (be warned this is a substantial task). The DAS can be used to test the connection to see if the seat is empty or occupied; it should set off as occupied after 26 lbs" (12Kg).
# Diagnose where the issue is occurring and fix the sensor (see below).
# Disable the passenger seat occupancy sensor in DAS (see section below).
# Replace the sensor with an electronic sensor emulator (see section below).

=== Fixing seat occupancy sensor ===
If the Airbag ECU says it can't communicate with the seat occupancy sensor, or open or shorted wiring, then any one of these causes may exist:
* Breakage of electrical cable between the plug connector and the sensor (quite common). If this is the case the wire can be repaired.
* The sensor elements may be dead
* The sensor electronics may be shorted. This can be quickly verified by measuring the voltage between the red and brown wires in the yellow connector, the voltage should be about 12V DC. The sensor mat gets the power from the seat control module located under the passenger seat. If it is around 0.6V, the sensor is short-circuiting the supply voltage to the ground which causes the built-in circuit protection to drop the voltage to 0.6V when the sensor is connected. The electronics are in the white box inside the seat cushion. The white box is filled with some caulk type filler. Nasty job, this box is neither meant to be opened nor repaired. Once opened and the caulk excavated (using knives, screw drivers and a heat gun) to reveal the components, there can be found a 15uF tantalum capacitor which is shorted when voltage is applied to it. It can be replaced with a regular electrolytic capacitor.

===Disabling seat occupancy sensor in DAS===
To disable passenger seat occupancy sensor in DAS select control unit "AB - Airbag" -> "Development data" -> "Control unit adaptations" -> "Control unit adaptations (Variant coding)" -> "Fahrzeugausstattung kodieren" and change "AKSE/OC Beifahrer" from "ja" to "nein" (see photo below).

[[File:W220_DAS_disable_passenger_occupancy_sensor.png|thumb|none|DAS: Passenger seat occupancy sensor enabled]]

In case "AB - Airbag" control unit has been reset, the "Initial startup" will reset the module to default settings enabling the passenger seat occupancy sensor. If seat occupancy sensor will throw error codes the "Initial startup" will complete only partially showing "Initial startup could only be partially completed. Cause: - There are current fault codes present.". The "Initial startup" can be completed fully by locking the control module using "Development data" -> "Actuations" -> "Complete index of actuations" -> "Steuergerät verriegeln (FN_SG_Verriegeln)". This will lock the ECU and SRS light will go off.

===Installing seat occupancy sensor emulator===
An electronic emulator may be purchased on eBay for a few dollars and substituted for the SRS Sensor Mat. Search for something like "seat occupation sensor emulator W220" (~EUR 10).

There are two types of sensors available depending on W220 model year:
* Type 6 for pre-[[facelift]] W220
* Type 2 for [[facelift]] W220

'''Safety note:''' The emulator simulates that there is always someone sitting in the passenger seat, so in case of an accident, the airbag goes on.
Do not carry babies or children in the front seat, activating the airbag can cause serious damage in the event of a collision.

The emulator is not a simple device but contains several electronic components.

{|
|[[File:W220 SRS Emulator 001.JPG|thumb|none|Seat occupation sensor emulator (Type 6)]]
|[[File:W220 SRS Emulator 002.JPG|thumb|none|Internal view of the emulator]]
|[[File:W220_seat_occupation_sensor_emulator_type_2.jpg|thumb|none|Seat occupation sensor emulator (Type 2)]]
|}

Install of the emulator:
# Put the seat fully forward and then lift up the rear section and place on a suitable support to expose the underneath part of the seat.
# Identify the SRS occupancy sensor connector. It is the yellow connector with red, white and brown wires.
# Unplug the SRS occupancy sensor and make the cable accessible. You may have to cut one or two plastic ties to fully release the cable. Then cut the plug off the cable at the point marked with the red arrow.
# The cut-off plug may now be taken to a workbench and the emulator soldered to the plug leads. Observe the correct colors, i.e., red to red (+12V), white to white (data) and brown to brown (Ground). Make sure to place heat shrink sleeving over the emulator wires before connecting them.
# Shrink the protective sleeving and the emulator is now finished.
# Reconnect the SRS occupancy sensor plug to its socket (left red arrow) and secure with plastic tie to the existing bunch of cables (right red arrow).
# Reassemble the passenger seat.

{|
|[[File:W220 SRS Emulator 003.JPG|thumb|none|Occupancy sensor connector (shown on [[RHD]] vehicle)]]
|[[File:W220 SRS Emulator 004.JPG|thumb|none|Cut the cable here]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W220 SRS Emulator 005.JPG|thumb|none|Emulator soldered to the plug]]
|[[File:W220 SRS Emulator 006.JPG|thumb|none|Emulator with the plug]]
|[[File:W220 SRS Emulator 007.JPG|thumb|none|Emulator with the plug installed]]
|}

===Remove/install seat occupied recognition sensor (up to 31/08/2002)===


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_seat_occupied_recognition_sensor_up_to_31-08-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Seat occupation connector
* B48 - Passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor
* N32/1 - Left front seat adjustment control module with memory
* N32/2 - Right front seat adjustment control module with memory
|}

# Remove cover of front seat cushion. On passenger-side only.
# Switch off ignition, withdraw ignition key
# Switch off engine, remove transmitter key from vehicle (with keyless go code 889). Keep transmitter key outside the transmitter range.
# Guide the connector (1) upwards out of the rubberized fiber matting
# Remove the front passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor (B48) from the rubberized fiber matting. Installation: Lay the front passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor (B48) evenly on the rubberized fiber matting. The woven side must face upwards. Do not kink front passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor (B48).
# Install in the reverse order
# Carry out diagnosis

===Remove/install seat occupied recognition sensor (as of 01/09/2002)===

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_seat_occupied_recognition_sensor_as_of_01-09-2002.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Control module with connection line
* 2 - Foam padding
* B48 - Passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor
|}
# Remove cover of front seat cushion. On passenger-side only.
# Pull control module with connection line (1) out of the end face of the foam padding (2) (see arrow). Guide connection line through the slot in the foam padding (2).
# Open foam padding (2) on the seat surface and expose front passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor (B48)
# Pull fastening hooks (see arrows) out of the foam padding (2). Pull out the fastening hooks slowly and carefully so that the foam support (2) is not damaged.
# Pull out the control module with connection line (1) between the core and seat surface of the foam padding (2)
# Remove front passenger seat occupied and child seat recognition sensor (B48) from seating surface of the foam support (2).Installation: It is essential to ensure that the film with the identification "TOP" (see enlarged section) is inserted upwards.
# Install in the reverse order
# Carry out diagnosis

==Retrofit front seat height adapter==

{|
|[[File:W220_retrofit_front_seat_height_adapter.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Spacer
* 2 - Foam rubber
* 3 - Covers
* 4 - Bolts
* 5 - Front seat
|}

# Remove bolts (4, 4 pieces) on the front and rear seat rail
# Raise front seat frame, place spacers (1) (part number A2209101736) on the right and left as well as at the front and rear under the under the seat rails and fasten with the bolts contained in the accessories. Do not damage covers (3).
# Clamp foamed material (2) in each case in front of and behind the spacer (1) under the covers (3) of the seat rails
# Check seat adjustment for proper function
# If the package changes, supplement the code or designation of the relevant special equipment on the vehicle data card

Torque specifications:
* Bolt to seat runner: 50 Nm (up to 30/11/2001)

File:W220 seat occupation sensor emulator type 2.jpg

2025-12-20T17:10:52Z

Pokseva:

Windows

2025-08-24T18:42:50Z

Pokseva: /* Adjusting crank window in front door */ photo added

==Remove/install crank window in front door==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window.png]]
|
* 1 - Crank window
* 2 - Bolts
* 3 - Power window guide rail
* 4 - Power window
* 5 - Assembly opening
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window_2.jpg]]
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window_3.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Crank window
* 2 - Screw
* 3 - Power window guide rail
* 4 - Power window
* M10/3 - Left front power window motor
* M10/4 - Right front power window motor
|}

# Remove/install front door liner
# Remove insulating mat in bottom area of inner door panel. Installation: Before installing insulating mat, check crank window (1) for easy motion.
# Remove inner sealing rail
# Remove trim strip with outer sealing rail
# Unscrew bolt (2). Removal: Open crank window (1) until assembly openings (5) of inner door panel and mounting screws (2) are accessible. Installation: When installing screws (2): Adjust crank window (1) for front door.
# Move crank window (1) out of mounts on power window (4). Thereby move crank window (1) upward until mounting lugs for crank window (1) slide out of power window mounts (4).
# Remove crank window (1) out of door shaft. For this purpose tilt crank window (1) toward front and pull out of front window guide rail downward and turn until rear edge of crank window (1) can be removed from door shaft. Installation: Clean crank window (1) with MB auto glass cleaner.
# Install in the reverse order

==Adjusting crank window in front door==


{|
|[[File:W220_Adjusting_crank_window_in_front_door.png]]
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window_2.jpg]]
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window_3.jpg]]
|-
|
|
* 1 - Crank window
* 2 - Bolt
* 3 - Guide rails
|
* 2 - Bolt
* 4 - Window lift mechanism
* M10/3 - Left front power window motor
* M10/4 - Right front power window motor
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Adjusting_crank_window_in_front_door_screw.jpg|thumb|none|Left adjustment screw]]
|}

Checking:
# Check installed position of crank window on window frame. When the crank window is adjusted correctly, the edge of the glass runs parallel to the contour of the front wall pillar and roof panelling, illustration on left. The crank window should not be completely closed.
# Check installed position on vertical window guide rail. Illustration on left, the crank window (1) should fit in the window guide rail completely.

Removing, installing:
# Remove door lining on front door
# Pull off sound deadening mat

Adjusting:
# Loosen bolts (2), correct crank window (1) upwards or downwards, at the same time press backwards into the vertical window guide rail and tighten bolts (2).
# Check crank window for ease of movement
# Install in reverse order

==Remove/install power window on front door==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_power_window_on_front_door.png]]
|
* 1 - Power window
* M10/3x1 - Left front power window motor connector
* M10/4x1 - Right front power window motor connector
|}

# Remove/install front door liner
# Remove insulating mat from inner door panel, glue on
# Remove crank window
# Remove left/right front power window motor connector (M10/3x1, M10/4x1) from power window motor
# Drill pop rivets (arrows) out of inner door panel or cut out. To drill out use 4.8 mm dia. bit and do not damage inner door panel. Use punch to drive out remaining rivet residues. Remove rivet residues and chips from door, danger of rust. Installation: Rivet power window (1) to inner door panel flush with new pop rivets.
# Unhook power window (1) out of inner door panel and remove downward through assembly opening. Installation: Hook window lift mechanism onto inner door panel with the four assembly hooks.
# Install in the reverse order

== Remove/install crank window in rear door ==


{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_window_in_rear_door.png]]
|
* 1 - Window stay
* 2 - Crank window
* 3 - Screw
* 4 - Assembly opening
* 5 - Power window guide rail
|}

# Remove door liner from rear door
# Remove insulating mat from inner door panel. Installation: Before installing insulating mat, check crank window for easy motion. Replace damaged insulating mat.
# Remove inner sealing rail
# Remove trim strip with outer sealing rail
# Unscrew bolt (3). Removal: Open crank window (2) until the mounting screw (3) of the window guide rail in the assembly opening (4) is accessible. Installation: Install screw (3) so that the crank window (2) can be moved up and down properly.
# Slide crank window (2) downward and position in door. First move crank window (2) out of window guide rail.
# Remove window rail guide (5) together with window stay (1). Remove window guide rail (5) only in area of window stay. Installation: Coat window guide rail (5) with soap solution.
# Turn crank window (2) until it can be removed out of window shaft upward.
# Install in the reverse order

[[File:W220_removing_power_window_guide_rail_rubber_seal.jpg|thumb|none|Removing window guide rail (rubber seal).]]

== Remove/install fixed window in rear door ==


{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_fixed_window_in_rear_door.png]]
|
* 1 - Window stay
* 2 - Screw
* 3 - Screw
* 4 - Fixed window
* 5 - Weatherstrip
|}

# Remove door liner from rear door
# Remove insulating mat from inner door panel. Installation: Before installing insulating mat, check crank window for easy motion. Replace damaged insulating mat.
# Remove inner sealing rail
# Remove trim strip with outer sealing rail
# Slide crank window downward and position in door.
# Remove window guide rail from window stay (1). Installation: Coat window guide rail with soap solution.
# Unscrew screws (2 and 3)
# Remove window stay (1). Avoid damaging paint.
# Pull fixed window (4) out toward front together with rubber frame (5). Before installing coat rubber frame (5) with soap solution.
# Install in the reverse order.

{|
|[[File:W220_screw_holding_rear_window_stay.jpg|thumb|none|Screw (2) holding rear window stay.]]
|[[File:W220_screw_holding_rear_window_stay_2.jpg|thumb|none|Screw (3) holding rear window stay.]]
|[[File:W220_removing_rear_window_stay.jpg|thumb|none|Removing rear window stay.]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_rear_window_stay_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Rear window stay removed.]]
|[[File:W220_removing_fixed_quarter_glass.jpg|thumb|none|Pulling out fixed quarter glass.]]
|[[File:W220_fixed_quarter_glass_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Fixed quarter glass removed.]]
|}

==Remove/install power window on rear door==


{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_power_window_in_rear_door_1.png]]
|
* 1 - Power window
* 2 - Crank window
* M106/x1 - Right rear power window motor connector
* M105/x1 - Left rear power window motor connector
|}
{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_power_window_in_rear_door_2.png]]
|
* 3 - Clamping screw
* 4 - Assembly opening
|}
# Remove/install door liner on rear door
# Remove insulating mat from inner door panel
# Unscrew mounting screw (3). Removal: Open crank window (2) until the mounting screw (3) is accessible in the assembly opening (4) of the power window guide rail. Installation: Install screw (3) so that the crank window (2) can be moved up and down properly.
# Move crank window (2) completely upward. Secure against falling down with assembly wedges.
# Drill pop rivet (arrows) out of inner door panel or cut out. To drill out use 4.8 mm dia. bit and do not damage inner door panel. Use punch to drive out remaining rivet residues. Remove rivet residues and chips from door, danger of rust. Installation: Rivet power window (1) to inner door panel flush with new pop rivets.
# Remove power window motor connector (M10/6x1, M10/5x1) from power window motor.
# Unhook power window (1) from inner door panel and remove through assembly opening. Installation: Hook power window in at inner door panel with assembly hook.
# Install in the reverse order

==Remove/install inner sealing rail==

Shown on model 202:
{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_inner_sealing_rail.png]]
|
* 1 - Sealing rail
* 2 - Clamp
|}

# Open crank window
# Remove door lining
# Press sealing rail (1) off of inner door panel with assembly wedge. Insert assembly wedge directly next to clips (2).
# Check clips (2), replace if necessary. Clips (2) are attached to inner door panel.
# Install in the reverse order.

==Remove/install outer sealing rail==

Illustrated on driver's door on model 202
{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_outer_sealing_rail_1.png]]
|[[File:W220_remove_install_outer_sealing_rail_2.png]]
|
* 1 - Trim strip
* 2 - Sealing rail
* 3 - Clamp
* 4 - Blind rivet
* 5 - Clamp
* 6 - Cover
|}

# Open window
# Press trim strip (1) off of outer window ledge. Avoid damaging paint.
# Press sealing rail (2) off of window shaft. Insert installation wedge directly next to clip.
# Check retaining clips (3 and 5) and replace, if necessary. Clip (3) is riveted on. Clips (5) are installed on window shaft.
# Install in the reverse order

[[File:W220_removing_trim_strip_of_outer_window_ledge.jpg|thumb|none|Removing trim strip of outer window ledge.]]

== Powering window motor from handheld battery ==
{|
|[[File:W220_power_window_motor_installed.jpg|thumb|none|Power window motor installed.]]
|[[File:W220_power_window_motor_male_connector.jpg|thumb|none|Contacts of power window motor connector.]]
|}
# Locate power window motor
# Disconnect plug
# Connect battery to top left and right contacts
# Switch polarity to raise or lower as needed

== Glass delamination problem ==
Popular problem with IR glass is that it becomes delaminated.
[[File:W220_IR_window_delamination.jpg|thumb|none|Window glass delamination.]]

== Resources ==
* http://www.benzworld.org/forums/w220-s-class/2806666-rear-door-glass-quarter-glass-removal-2.html

File:W220 Adjusting crank window in front door screw.jpg

2025-08-24T18:40:56Z

Pokseva:

Doors

2025-08-24T18:27:27Z

Pokseva: /* Inner door handle illumination */ updated photos; added diode specification and LED upgrade

== Handles ==

=== Parts ===
{|
|[[File:W220_door_handle_left_A2207601170_9999.jpg|thumb|none|Door handle (left) A2207601170 9999 (colorless - requires painting).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_prepared_for_painting.jpg|thumb|none|Door handle left ([[KEYLESS-GO]]) prepared for repainting. ]]
|}

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2207601170
|Left (front/rear)
|-
|A2207601270
|Right (front/rear)
|-
|A2207601370
|Left (front/rear). For vehicles with option code [[Option_codes#889_-_KEYLESS_-_GO|889]] ([[KEYLESS-GO]]).

|-
|A2207601470
|Right (front/rear). For vehicles with option code [[Option_codes#889_-_KEYLESS_-_GO|889]] ([[KEYLESS-GO]]).
|}

=== KEYLESS-GO ===

==== Wiring ====

KEYLESS-GO handles have wiring with 4-pin connector.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector_door_side.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector (door side)]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector_wires.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector (handle side)]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector pins (handle side)]]
|}

* Pin 1 - white wire
* Pin 2 - red wire
* Pin 3 - blue wire
* Pin 4 - yellow wire

The white and red wires (pin 1 and 2) are used for capacitive sensor that signals when a hand is inserted into a door handle.
The blue and yellow wires (pin 3 and 4) close circuit when the KEYLESS-GO button is pressed on a door handle.

W215 vehicles have exactly the same door handles with the only difference that [[KEYLESS-GO]] handle has the opposite connector (male instead of female) .
{|
|[[File:W215_and_W220_door_handles_left_with_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|W215 vs W220 left door handle (note the opposite connectors).]]
|}

==== Button ====
It is common that by age the KEYLESS-GO button starts malfunction or fails completely.

The correct working of KEYLESS-GO button (microswitch) can be tested by measuring the resistance between connector pins 3 and 4. When the microswitch is not pressed the resistance must be infinite. When pressed the circuit is closed resulting in < 500 Ohm resistance measurement.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_test_multimeter.jpg|thumb|none|Testing KEYLESS-GO button using multimeter]]
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DAbFvn_emi8|320|left|Testing several KEYLESS-GO handles using multimeter|frame}}
|}

==== Button rubber ====
After years of wear the rubber on KEYLESS-GO button develops cracks and allows water to get in. The moisture in turn can lead to the damage of the button microswitch.

Aftermarket replacement rubber buttons can be bought on ebay for EUR 40 per pair. The residues of the old rubber have to be removed and the new button glued on.

Link to UK seller where you can buy 4 rubber buttons for about 29 EUR https://x8r.co.uk/mercedes.html.

PDF instruction how to change the rubber button https://www.x8r.co.uk/over/buttonsmallover/Mercedes-Benz-Keyless-Go-Entry-Door-Exterior-Handle-replacement-button-square-rubber-repair-fix-instructions-repair-video.pdf

YouTube video instruction how to change the rubber button
{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XC5e_vI8X1M|320|left|Mercedes Keyless Go Door Handle Button Square Cover Rubber Kit Install Instructions|frame}}
|}

If the KEYLESS-GO microswitch is also damaged, the easiest solution is to buy a used handle and repaint it.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_rubber_button_off.jpg|thumb|none|Damaged KEYLESS-GO rubber button.]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_replacement_rubber_buttons_front.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO rubber buttons (front).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_replacement_rubber_buttons_back.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO rubber buttons (back).]]
|}

==== Capacitive sensor ====

It is common that by age the KEYLESS-GO capacitive sensor inside a handle starts to malfunction or fails completely.

The inside of a KEYLESS-GO door handle contains a circuit board. The space inside the handle is filled with epoxy.
The microswitch of KEYLESS-GO button seems to be connected using a type of thin ribbon cable.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_inside_monolith_wiring.jpg|thumb|none|Inside KEYLESS-GO handle monolith (wiring).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_inside_monolith_button.jpg|thumb|none|Inside KEYLESS-GO handle monolith (button).]]
|}

=== Chrome ===
With time the chrome layer of door handle develops bubbles and starts to peal off.

The chrome part is not sold separately, but can be replaced from another handle.

The chrome on KEYLESS-GO door handles can be easily removed by unscrewing two screws.

The chrome on the door handle without KEYLESS-GO button can be pulled off by carefully prying it off from the inner side of the door handle.

{|
|[[File:W220_door_handle_chrome_peals_off.jpg|thumb|none|Chrome layer peals off from the door handle.]]
|[[File:W220_door_chrome_outside_standard_and_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO (top) and standard (bottom) chrome.]]
|[[File:W220_door_chrome_inside_standard_and_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO (top) and standard (bottom) chrome.]]
|}

== Driver's door lock ==
[[File:W220_drivers_door_handle_lock_dissected.jpg|thumb|none|Driver's door handle lock (dissected)]]

== Door pillar panel covers ==

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2206900787 (~ EUR 50)
|Front left
|-
|A2206900887 (~ EUR 50)
|Front right
|-
|A2206901187 (~ EUR 50)
|Rear left
|-
|A2206901287 (~ EUR 50)
|Rear right
|}


The covers are held in place by an extremely strong tape that is already on the replacement parts. One must thoroughly clean the old tape residue off, or it will interfere with a proper mount - it can hold the new part too far out. Care must be exercised in positioning the new parts.

{|
|[[File:W220_rust_on_door_B_pillar.jpg|thumb|none|Rust on B pillar cover.]]
|[[File:W220_door_pillar_removal.jpg|thumb|none|Removal of B pillar cover.]]
|[[File:W220_door_pillar_A2206901287.jpg|thumb|none|Rear right cover trim.]]
|}

There are aftermarket carbon covers available on ebay, however, these covers come without plastic top ending.

== Inner door handle illumination ==

The inner door handle illumination is provided by an LED module installed in the door lining.
The LED module (A2208200321 for the left side / A2208200421 for the right side) contains a small diode
that directs light to the door handle via an optical fiber.

The black part of the LED module is universal, while the gray optical fiber is side-specific.
The LED diode (3mm x 5mm) emits orange light and draws 35mA of current at 13V.
A resistor, installed on the negative wire, measures approximately 300 ohms.

{|
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module_installed.jpg|thumb|none|LED module installed]]
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module.jpg|thumb|none|LED module powered]]
|[[File:W220_door_handle_ilumination_optical_wire_left_and_right.jpg|thumb|none|Left vs right optical wire]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module_opened.jpg|thumb|none|LED module opened]]
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module_switched_on.jpg|thumb|none|LED diode powered]]
|}

It is possible to replace the original diode with a larger and more efficient one
that produces significantly brighter light while drawing the same current as the original.
For example, the result below shows the use of a 3V, 5mm orange diode rated at 50mA, reusing the original 300-ohm resistor.

{|
|[[File:W220_door_handle_ilumination_LED_upgrade_5mm_50ma_diode.jpg|thumb|none|Re-soldered larger LED diode]]
|[[File:W220_door_handle_ilumination_LED_upgrade.jpg|thumb|none|LED upgrade result]]
|}

==Door Handle Latch Mechanism==
'''Issues'''
* Inner handle is too loose and will not pull the latch mechanism far enough forward to release the latch.
* There is no tension adjustment for the cable.
* The cable slips out of the guide very easily as you move the inner door cover away from the door.
* A common fault is improper positioning of the cable in the inner handle mechanism.
'''Solution'''

At the back of the door handle mechanism there is a "Guide" - the inner part of the cable must be threaded into the guide (1 in the photo), and the cable jacket fitted into a small receptacle (at 2).

[[File:W220_Door_Handle_Latch_Mechanism.JPG|thumb|none|Door handle latch mechanism.]]

With that done, the cable is positioned properly, the tension is correct, the door handle operates the latch, and springs back to the proper position when released.



== Replacing door check ==


[[File:W220_Removing_installing_door_catch.jpg|600px]]

Removing, installing:
# Detach/attach door lining
# Pull off sound deadening mat in front area of inner door panel
# Remove screws (1) from A-pillar (or B-pillar, in case of [[rear doors]]) ''using Torx E10 socket''
# Remove/install door speaker (in the case of [[front doors]])
# ''Remove door check plastic cover (it has opening on one side)''
# Remove screws (2) from door ''using 10mm socket''. Hold door catch tight from inside for this step. Avoid damaging paint.
# Remove door retaining strap through installation opening in inner door panel
# Install in the reverse order

Torque specifications (front and rear door):
* Screw for door retaining strap on body: 14 Nm
* Bolt for door catch to inner door panel: 10 Nm

{|
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_check_removal.jpg|thumb|none|Door check removal front left door]]
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_check_inside.jpg|thumb|none|Door check from inside door]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_check_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Door check removed]]
|[[File:W220_front_door_check_original_vs_trucktec.jpg|thumb|none|Original vs TRUCKTEC AUTOMOTIVE]]
|}

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EGv2Ms2rPDM|320|center|Door strap/check replacement|frame}}
|}

=== Parts ===
The same door check part fits both sides.
However, when installing make sure that "VL/VR" marking is upside for left/right side, respectively.
* A2207200016 Door check front (TRUCKTEC AUTOMOTIVE 02.53.096 - 10 EUR)
* A2207300016 Door check rear (VAICO V30-2291 - 30 EUR)
* A2207230508 Door check cover

{|
|[[File:W220_front_door_check_TRUCKTEC_AUTOMOTIVE_02.53.096.jpg|thumb|none|Front door check A2207200016 (TRUCKTEC AUTOMOTIVE 02.53.09)]]
|[[File:W220_door_check_cover_A2207230508.jpg|thumb|none|Door check cover A2207230508]]
|[[File:W220_door_check_bolts_E10.jpg|thumb|none|Door check bolts]]
|}

File:W220 door handle ilumination LED upgrade 5mm 50ma diode.jpg

2025-08-24T18:09:41Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 inner door handle illumination led module switched on.jpg

2025-08-24T18:08:58Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 inner door handle illumination led module opened.jpg

2025-08-24T18:08:05Z

Pokseva: Pokseva uploaded a new version of File:W220 inner door handle illumination led module opened.jpg

File:W220 door handle ilumination LED upgrade.jpg

2025-08-24T17:52:11Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 door handle ilumination optical wire left and right.jpg

2025-08-24T17:51:54Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 inner door handle illumination led module installed.jpg

2025-08-24T17:43:54Z

Pokseva: Pokseva uploaded a new version of File:W220 inner door handle illumination led module installed.jpg

Doors

2025-08-24T17:35:40Z

Pokseva: /* Replacing door check */ added photos and parts

== Handles ==

=== Parts ===
{|
|[[File:W220_door_handle_left_A2207601170_9999.jpg|thumb|none|Door handle (left) A2207601170 9999 (colorless - requires painting).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_prepared_for_painting.jpg|thumb|none|Door handle left ([[KEYLESS-GO]]) prepared for repainting. ]]
|}

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2207601170
|Left (front/rear)
|-
|A2207601270
|Right (front/rear)
|-
|A2207601370
|Left (front/rear). For vehicles with option code [[Option_codes#889_-_KEYLESS_-_GO|889]] ([[KEYLESS-GO]]).

|-
|A2207601470
|Right (front/rear). For vehicles with option code [[Option_codes#889_-_KEYLESS_-_GO|889]] ([[KEYLESS-GO]]).
|}

=== KEYLESS-GO ===

==== Wiring ====

KEYLESS-GO handles have wiring with 4-pin connector.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector_door_side.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector (door side)]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector_wires.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector (handle side)]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector pins (handle side)]]
|}

* Pin 1 - white wire
* Pin 2 - red wire
* Pin 3 - blue wire
* Pin 4 - yellow wire

The white and red wires (pin 1 and 2) are used for capacitive sensor that signals when a hand is inserted into a door handle.
The blue and yellow wires (pin 3 and 4) close circuit when the KEYLESS-GO button is pressed on a door handle.

W215 vehicles have exactly the same door handles with the only difference that [[KEYLESS-GO]] handle has the opposite connector (male instead of female) .
{|
|[[File:W215_and_W220_door_handles_left_with_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|W215 vs W220 left door handle (note the opposite connectors).]]
|}

==== Button ====
It is common that by age the KEYLESS-GO button starts malfunction or fails completely.

The correct working of KEYLESS-GO button (microswitch) can be tested by measuring the resistance between connector pins 3 and 4. When the microswitch is not pressed the resistance must be infinite. When pressed the circuit is closed resulting in < 500 Ohm resistance measurement.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_test_multimeter.jpg|thumb|none|Testing KEYLESS-GO button using multimeter]]
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DAbFvn_emi8|320|left|Testing several KEYLESS-GO handles using multimeter|frame}}
|}

==== Button rubber ====
After years of wear the rubber on KEYLESS-GO button develops cracks and allows water to get in. The moisture in turn can lead to the damage of the button microswitch.

Aftermarket replacement rubber buttons can be bought on ebay for EUR 40 per pair. The residues of the old rubber have to be removed and the new button glued on.

Link to UK seller where you can buy 4 rubber buttons for about 29 EUR https://x8r.co.uk/mercedes.html.

PDF instruction how to change the rubber button https://www.x8r.co.uk/over/buttonsmallover/Mercedes-Benz-Keyless-Go-Entry-Door-Exterior-Handle-replacement-button-square-rubber-repair-fix-instructions-repair-video.pdf

YouTube video instruction how to change the rubber button
{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XC5e_vI8X1M|320|left|Mercedes Keyless Go Door Handle Button Square Cover Rubber Kit Install Instructions|frame}}
|}

If the KEYLESS-GO microswitch is also damaged, the easiest solution is to buy a used handle and repaint it.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_rubber_button_off.jpg|thumb|none|Damaged KEYLESS-GO rubber button.]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_replacement_rubber_buttons_front.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO rubber buttons (front).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_replacement_rubber_buttons_back.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO rubber buttons (back).]]
|}

==== Capacitive sensor ====

It is common that by age the KEYLESS-GO capacitive sensor inside a handle starts to malfunction or fails completely.

The inside of a KEYLESS-GO door handle contains a circuit board. The space inside the handle is filled with epoxy.
The microswitch of KEYLESS-GO button seems to be connected using a type of thin ribbon cable.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_inside_monolith_wiring.jpg|thumb|none|Inside KEYLESS-GO handle monolith (wiring).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_inside_monolith_button.jpg|thumb|none|Inside KEYLESS-GO handle monolith (button).]]
|}

=== Chrome ===
With time the chrome layer of door handle develops bubbles and starts to peal off.

The chrome part is not sold separately, but can be replaced from another handle.

The chrome on KEYLESS-GO door handles can be easily removed by unscrewing two screws.

The chrome on the door handle without KEYLESS-GO button can be pulled off by carefully prying it off from the inner side of the door handle.

{|
|[[File:W220_door_handle_chrome_peals_off.jpg|thumb|none|Chrome layer peals off from the door handle.]]
|[[File:W220_door_chrome_outside_standard_and_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO (top) and standard (bottom) chrome.]]
|[[File:W220_door_chrome_inside_standard_and_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO (top) and standard (bottom) chrome.]]
|}

== Driver's door lock ==
[[File:W220_drivers_door_handle_lock_dissected.jpg|thumb|none|Driver's door handle lock (dissected)]]

== Door pillar panel covers ==

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2206900787 (~ EUR 50)
|Front left
|-
|A2206900887 (~ EUR 50)
|Front right
|-
|A2206901187 (~ EUR 50)
|Rear left
|-
|A2206901287 (~ EUR 50)
|Rear right
|}


The covers are held in place by an extremely strong tape that is already on the replacement parts. One must thoroughly clean the old tape residue off, or it will interfere with a proper mount - it can hold the new part too far out. Care must be exercised in positioning the new parts.

{|
|[[File:W220_rust_on_door_B_pillar.jpg|thumb|none|Rust on B pillar cover.]]
|[[File:W220_door_pillar_removal.jpg|thumb|none|Removal of B pillar cover.]]
|[[File:W220_door_pillar_A2206901287.jpg|thumb|none|Rear right cover trim.]]
|}

There are aftermarket carbon covers available on ebay, however, these covers come without plastic top ending.

== Inner door handle illumination ==

Inner door illumination is done by a LED module that is installed in door lining.
The LED module contains a small bulb while the light is directed to door handle over on optical wire.

{|
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module_installed.jpg|thumb|none|LED module installed]]
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module.jpg|thumb|none|LED module]]
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module_opened.jpg|thumb|none|LED module opened]]
|}

==Door Handle Latch Mechanism==
'''Issues'''
* Inner handle is too loose and will not pull the latch mechanism far enough forward to release the latch.
* There is no tension adjustment for the cable.
* The cable slips out of the guide very easily as you move the inner door cover away from the door.
* A common fault is improper positioning of the cable in the inner handle mechanism.
'''Solution'''

At the back of the door handle mechanism there is a "Guide" - the inner part of the cable must be threaded into the guide (1 in the photo), and the cable jacket fitted into a small receptacle (at 2).

[[File:W220_Door_Handle_Latch_Mechanism.JPG|thumb|none|Door handle latch mechanism.]]

With that done, the cable is positioned properly, the tension is correct, the door handle operates the latch, and springs back to the proper position when released.



== Replacing door check ==


[[File:W220_Removing_installing_door_catch.jpg|600px]]

Removing, installing:
# Detach/attach door lining
# Pull off sound deadening mat in front area of inner door panel
# Remove screws (1) from A-pillar (or B-pillar, in case of [[rear doors]]) ''using Torx E10 socket''
# Remove/install door speaker (in the case of [[front doors]])
# ''Remove door check plastic cover (it has opening on one side)''
# Remove screws (2) from door ''using 10mm socket''. Hold door catch tight from inside for this step. Avoid damaging paint.
# Remove door retaining strap through installation opening in inner door panel
# Install in the reverse order

Torque specifications (front and rear door):
* Screw for door retaining strap on body: 14 Nm
* Bolt for door catch to inner door panel: 10 Nm

{|
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_check_removal.jpg|thumb|none|Door check removal front left door]]
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_check_inside.jpg|thumb|none|Door check from inside door]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_check_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Door check removed]]
|[[File:W220_front_door_check_original_vs_trucktec.jpg|thumb|none|Original vs TRUCKTEC AUTOMOTIVE]]
|}

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=EGv2Ms2rPDM|320|center|Door strap/check replacement|frame}}
|}

=== Parts ===
The same door check part fits both sides.
However, when installing make sure that "VL/VR" marking is upside for left/right side, respectively.
* A2207200016 Door check front (TRUCKTEC AUTOMOTIVE 02.53.096 - 10 EUR)
* A2207300016 Door check rear (VAICO V30-2291 - 30 EUR)
* A2207230508 Door check cover

{|
|[[File:W220_front_door_check_TRUCKTEC_AUTOMOTIVE_02.53.096.jpg|thumb|none|Front door check A2207200016 (TRUCKTEC AUTOMOTIVE 02.53.09)]]
|[[File:W220_door_check_cover_A2207230508.jpg|thumb|none|Door check cover A2207230508]]
|[[File:W220_door_check_bolts_E10.jpg|thumb|none|Door check bolts]]
|}

File:W220 door check cover A2207230508.jpg

2025-08-24T17:31:34Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 front door check TRUCKTEC AUTOMOTIVE 02.53.096.jpg

2025-08-24T17:09:56Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 front left door check removed.jpg

2025-08-24T17:06:04Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 front left door check removal.jpg

2025-08-24T17:05:50Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 front left door check inside.jpg

2025-08-24T17:05:31Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 front door check original vs trucktec.jpg

2025-08-24T17:05:08Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 door check bolts E10.jpg

2025-08-24T17:04:53Z

Pokseva:

Windows

2025-08-22T16:14:54Z

Pokseva: /* Adjusting crank window in front door */ fixed photo layout

==Remove/install crank window in front door==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window.png]]
|
* 1 - Crank window
* 2 - Bolts
* 3 - Power window guide rail
* 4 - Power window
* 5 - Assembly opening
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window_2.jpg]]
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window_3.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Crank window
* 2 - Screw
* 3 - Power window guide rail
* 4 - Power window
* M10/3 - Left front power window motor
* M10/4 - Right front power window motor
|}

# Remove/install front door liner
# Remove insulating mat in bottom area of inner door panel. Installation: Before installing insulating mat, check crank window (1) for easy motion.
# Remove inner sealing rail
# Remove trim strip with outer sealing rail
# Unscrew bolt (2). Removal: Open crank window (1) until assembly openings (5) of inner door panel and mounting screws (2) are accessible. Installation: When installing screws (2): Adjust crank window (1) for front door.
# Move crank window (1) out of mounts on power window (4). Thereby move crank window (1) upward until mounting lugs for crank window (1) slide out of power window mounts (4).
# Remove crank window (1) out of door shaft. For this purpose tilt crank window (1) toward front and pull out of front window guide rail downward and turn until rear edge of crank window (1) can be removed from door shaft. Installation: Clean crank window (1) with MB auto glass cleaner.
# Install in the reverse order

==Adjusting crank window in front door==


{|
|[[File:W220_Adjusting_crank_window_in_front_door.png]]
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window_2.jpg]]
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_crank_window_3.jpg]]
|-
|
|
* 1 - Crank window
* 2 - Bolt
* 3 - Guide rails
|
* 2 - Bolt
* 4 - Window lift mechanism
* M10/3 - Left front power window motor
* M10/4 - Right front power window motor
|}

Checking:
# Check installed position of crank window on window frame. When the crank window is adjusted correctly, the edge of the glass runs parallel to the contour of the front wall pillar and roof panelling, illustration on left. The crank window should not be completely closed.
# Check installed position on vertical window guide rail. Illustration on left, the crank window (1) should fit in the window guide rail completely.

Removing, installing:
# Remove door lining on front door
# Pull off sound deadening mat

Adjusting:
# Loosen bolts (2), correct crank window (1) upwards or downwards, at the same time press backwards into the vertical window guide rail and tighten bolts (2).
# Check crank window for ease of movement
# Install in reverse order

==Remove/install power window on front door==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_power_window_on_front_door.png]]
|
* 1 - Power window
* M10/3x1 - Left front power window motor connector
* M10/4x1 - Right front power window motor connector
|}

# Remove/install front door liner
# Remove insulating mat from inner door panel, glue on
# Remove crank window
# Remove left/right front power window motor connector (M10/3x1, M10/4x1) from power window motor
# Drill pop rivets (arrows) out of inner door panel or cut out. To drill out use 4.8 mm dia. bit and do not damage inner door panel. Use punch to drive out remaining rivet residues. Remove rivet residues and chips from door, danger of rust. Installation: Rivet power window (1) to inner door panel flush with new pop rivets.
# Unhook power window (1) out of inner door panel and remove downward through assembly opening. Installation: Hook window lift mechanism onto inner door panel with the four assembly hooks.
# Install in the reverse order

== Remove/install crank window in rear door ==


{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_window_in_rear_door.png]]
|
* 1 - Window stay
* 2 - Crank window
* 3 - Screw
* 4 - Assembly opening
* 5 - Power window guide rail
|}

# Remove door liner from rear door
# Remove insulating mat from inner door panel. Installation: Before installing insulating mat, check crank window for easy motion. Replace damaged insulating mat.
# Remove inner sealing rail
# Remove trim strip with outer sealing rail
# Unscrew bolt (3). Removal: Open crank window (2) until the mounting screw (3) of the window guide rail in the assembly opening (4) is accessible. Installation: Install screw (3) so that the crank window (2) can be moved up and down properly.
# Slide crank window (2) downward and position in door. First move crank window (2) out of window guide rail.
# Remove window rail guide (5) together with window stay (1). Remove window guide rail (5) only in area of window stay. Installation: Coat window guide rail (5) with soap solution.
# Turn crank window (2) until it can be removed out of window shaft upward.
# Install in the reverse order

[[File:W220_removing_power_window_guide_rail_rubber_seal.jpg|thumb|none|Removing window guide rail (rubber seal).]]

== Remove/install fixed window in rear door ==


{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_fixed_window_in_rear_door.png]]
|
* 1 - Window stay
* 2 - Screw
* 3 - Screw
* 4 - Fixed window
* 5 - Weatherstrip
|}

# Remove door liner from rear door
# Remove insulating mat from inner door panel. Installation: Before installing insulating mat, check crank window for easy motion. Replace damaged insulating mat.
# Remove inner sealing rail
# Remove trim strip with outer sealing rail
# Slide crank window downward and position in door.
# Remove window guide rail from window stay (1). Installation: Coat window guide rail with soap solution.
# Unscrew screws (2 and 3)
# Remove window stay (1). Avoid damaging paint.
# Pull fixed window (4) out toward front together with rubber frame (5). Before installing coat rubber frame (5) with soap solution.
# Install in the reverse order.

{|
|[[File:W220_screw_holding_rear_window_stay.jpg|thumb|none|Screw (2) holding rear window stay.]]
|[[File:W220_screw_holding_rear_window_stay_2.jpg|thumb|none|Screw (3) holding rear window stay.]]
|[[File:W220_removing_rear_window_stay.jpg|thumb|none|Removing rear window stay.]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_rear_window_stay_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Rear window stay removed.]]
|[[File:W220_removing_fixed_quarter_glass.jpg|thumb|none|Pulling out fixed quarter glass.]]
|[[File:W220_fixed_quarter_glass_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Fixed quarter glass removed.]]
|}

==Remove/install power window on rear door==


{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_power_window_in_rear_door_1.png]]
|
* 1 - Power window
* 2 - Crank window
* M106/x1 - Right rear power window motor connector
* M105/x1 - Left rear power window motor connector
|}
{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_power_window_in_rear_door_2.png]]
|
* 3 - Clamping screw
* 4 - Assembly opening
|}
# Remove/install door liner on rear door
# Remove insulating mat from inner door panel
# Unscrew mounting screw (3). Removal: Open crank window (2) until the mounting screw (3) is accessible in the assembly opening (4) of the power window guide rail. Installation: Install screw (3) so that the crank window (2) can be moved up and down properly.
# Move crank window (2) completely upward. Secure against falling down with assembly wedges.
# Drill pop rivet (arrows) out of inner door panel or cut out. To drill out use 4.8 mm dia. bit and do not damage inner door panel. Use punch to drive out remaining rivet residues. Remove rivet residues and chips from door, danger of rust. Installation: Rivet power window (1) to inner door panel flush with new pop rivets.
# Remove power window motor connector (M10/6x1, M10/5x1) from power window motor.
# Unhook power window (1) from inner door panel and remove through assembly opening. Installation: Hook power window in at inner door panel with assembly hook.
# Install in the reverse order

==Remove/install inner sealing rail==

Shown on model 202:
{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_inner_sealing_rail.png]]
|
* 1 - Sealing rail
* 2 - Clamp
|}

# Open crank window
# Remove door lining
# Press sealing rail (1) off of inner door panel with assembly wedge. Insert assembly wedge directly next to clips (2).
# Check clips (2), replace if necessary. Clips (2) are attached to inner door panel.
# Install in the reverse order.

==Remove/install outer sealing rail==

Illustrated on driver's door on model 202
{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_outer_sealing_rail_1.png]]
|[[File:W220_remove_install_outer_sealing_rail_2.png]]
|
* 1 - Trim strip
* 2 - Sealing rail
* 3 - Clamp
* 4 - Blind rivet
* 5 - Clamp
* 6 - Cover
|}

# Open window
# Press trim strip (1) off of outer window ledge. Avoid damaging paint.
# Press sealing rail (2) off of window shaft. Insert installation wedge directly next to clip.
# Check retaining clips (3 and 5) and replace, if necessary. Clip (3) is riveted on. Clips (5) are installed on window shaft.
# Install in the reverse order

[[File:W220_removing_trim_strip_of_outer_window_ledge.jpg|thumb|none|Removing trim strip of outer window ledge.]]

== Powering window motor from handheld battery ==
{|
|[[File:W220_power_window_motor_installed.jpg|thumb|none|Power window motor installed.]]
|[[File:W220_power_window_motor_male_connector.jpg|thumb|none|Contacts of power window motor connector.]]
|}
# Locate power window motor
# Disconnect plug
# Connect battery to top left and right contacts
# Switch polarity to raise or lower as needed

== Glass delamination problem ==
Popular problem with IR glass is that it becomes delaminated.
[[File:W220_IR_window_delamination.jpg|thumb|none|Window glass delamination.]]

== Resources ==
* http://www.benzworld.org/forums/w220-s-class/2806666-rear-door-glass-quarter-glass-removal-2.html

Doors

2025-08-22T16:05:00Z

Pokseva: /* Replacing door check */

== Handles ==

=== Parts ===
{|
|[[File:W220_door_handle_left_A2207601170_9999.jpg|thumb|none|Door handle (left) A2207601170 9999 (colorless - requires painting).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_prepared_for_painting.jpg|thumb|none|Door handle left ([[KEYLESS-GO]]) prepared for repainting. ]]
|}

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2207601170
|Left (front/rear)
|-
|A2207601270
|Right (front/rear)
|-
|A2207601370
|Left (front/rear). For vehicles with option code [[Option_codes#889_-_KEYLESS_-_GO|889]] ([[KEYLESS-GO]]).

|-
|A2207601470
|Right (front/rear). For vehicles with option code [[Option_codes#889_-_KEYLESS_-_GO|889]] ([[KEYLESS-GO]]).
|}

=== KEYLESS-GO ===

==== Wiring ====

KEYLESS-GO handles have wiring with 4-pin connector.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector_door_side.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector (door side)]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector_wires.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector (handle side)]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector pins (handle side)]]
|}

* Pin 1 - white wire
* Pin 2 - red wire
* Pin 3 - blue wire
* Pin 4 - yellow wire

The white and red wires (pin 1 and 2) are used for capacitive sensor that signals when a hand is inserted into a door handle.
The blue and yellow wires (pin 3 and 4) close circuit when the KEYLESS-GO button is pressed on a door handle.

W215 vehicles have exactly the same door handles with the only difference that [[KEYLESS-GO]] handle has the opposite connector (male instead of female) .
{|
|[[File:W215_and_W220_door_handles_left_with_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|W215 vs W220 left door handle (note the opposite connectors).]]
|}

==== Button ====
It is common that by age the KEYLESS-GO button starts malfunction or fails completely.

The correct working of KEYLESS-GO button (microswitch) can be tested by measuring the resistance between connector pins 3 and 4. When the microswitch is not pressed the resistance must be infinite. When pressed the circuit is closed resulting in < 500 Ohm resistance measurement.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_test_multimeter.jpg|thumb|none|Testing KEYLESS-GO button using multimeter]]
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DAbFvn_emi8|320|left|Testing several KEYLESS-GO handles using multimeter|frame}}
|}

==== Button rubber ====
After years of wear the rubber on KEYLESS-GO button develops cracks and allows water to get in. The moisture in turn can lead to the damage of the button microswitch.

Aftermarket replacement rubber buttons can be bought on ebay for EUR 40 per pair. The residues of the old rubber have to be removed and the new button glued on.

Link to UK seller where you can buy 4 rubber buttons for about 29 EUR https://x8r.co.uk/mercedes.html.

PDF instruction how to change the rubber button https://www.x8r.co.uk/over/buttonsmallover/Mercedes-Benz-Keyless-Go-Entry-Door-Exterior-Handle-replacement-button-square-rubber-repair-fix-instructions-repair-video.pdf

YouTube video instruction how to change the rubber button
{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XC5e_vI8X1M|320|left|Mercedes Keyless Go Door Handle Button Square Cover Rubber Kit Install Instructions|frame}}
|}

If the KEYLESS-GO microswitch is also damaged, the easiest solution is to buy a used handle and repaint it.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_rubber_button_off.jpg|thumb|none|Damaged KEYLESS-GO rubber button.]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_replacement_rubber_buttons_front.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO rubber buttons (front).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_replacement_rubber_buttons_back.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO rubber buttons (back).]]
|}

==== Capacitive sensor ====

It is common that by age the KEYLESS-GO capacitive sensor inside a handle starts to malfunction or fails completely.

The inside of a KEYLESS-GO door handle contains a circuit board. The space inside the handle is filled with epoxy.
The microswitch of KEYLESS-GO button seems to be connected using a type of thin ribbon cable.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_inside_monolith_wiring.jpg|thumb|none|Inside KEYLESS-GO handle monolith (wiring).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_inside_monolith_button.jpg|thumb|none|Inside KEYLESS-GO handle monolith (button).]]
|}

=== Chrome ===
With time the chrome layer of door handle develops bubbles and starts to peal off.

The chrome part is not sold separately, but can be replaced from another handle.

The chrome on KEYLESS-GO door handles can be easily removed by unscrewing two screws.

The chrome on the door handle without KEYLESS-GO button can be pulled off by carefully prying it off from the inner side of the door handle.

{|
|[[File:W220_door_handle_chrome_peals_off.jpg|thumb|none|Chrome layer peals off from the door handle.]]
|[[File:W220_door_chrome_outside_standard_and_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO (top) and standard (bottom) chrome.]]
|[[File:W220_door_chrome_inside_standard_and_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO (top) and standard (bottom) chrome.]]
|}

== Driver's door lock ==
[[File:W220_drivers_door_handle_lock_dissected.jpg|thumb|none|Driver's door handle lock (dissected)]]

== Door pillar panel covers ==

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2206900787 (~ EUR 50)
|Front left
|-
|A2206900887 (~ EUR 50)
|Front right
|-
|A2206901187 (~ EUR 50)
|Rear left
|-
|A2206901287 (~ EUR 50)
|Rear right
|}


The covers are held in place by an extremely strong tape that is already on the replacement parts. One must thoroughly clean the old tape residue off, or it will interfere with a proper mount - it can hold the new part too far out. Care must be exercised in positioning the new parts.

{|
|[[File:W220_rust_on_door_B_pillar.jpg|thumb|none|Rust on B pillar cover.]]
|[[File:W220_door_pillar_removal.jpg|thumb|none|Removal of B pillar cover.]]
|[[File:W220_door_pillar_A2206901287.jpg|thumb|none|Rear right cover trim.]]
|}

There are aftermarket carbon covers available on ebay, however, these covers come without plastic top ending.

== Inner door handle illumination ==

Inner door illumination is done by a LED module that is installed in door lining.
The LED module contains a small bulb while the light is directed to door handle over on optical wire.

{|
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module_installed.jpg|thumb|none|LED module installed]]
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module.jpg|thumb|none|LED module]]
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module_opened.jpg|thumb|none|LED module opened]]
|}

==Door Handle Latch Mechanism==
'''Issues'''
* Inner handle is too loose and will not pull the latch mechanism far enough forward to release the latch.
* There is no tension adjustment for the cable.
* The cable slips out of the guide very easily as you move the inner door cover away from the door.
* A common fault is improper positioning of the cable in the inner handle mechanism.
'''Solution'''

At the back of the door handle mechanism there is a "Guide" - the inner part of the cable must be threaded into the guide (1 in the photo), and the cable jacket fitted into a small receptacle (at 2).

[[File:W220_Door_Handle_Latch_Mechanism.JPG|thumb|none|Door handle latch mechanism.]]

With that done, the cable is positioned properly, the tension is correct, the door handle operates the latch, and springs back to the proper position when released.



== Replacing door check ==


[[File:W220_Removing_installing_door_catch.jpg|600px]]

Removing, installing:
# Detach/attach door lining
# Pull off sound deadening mat in front area of inner door panel
# Remove screws (1) from A-pillar and B-pillar, respectively
# Remove/install door speaker (in the case of [[front doors]])
# Remove screws (2) from door. Hold door catch tight from inside for this step. Avoid damaging paint.
# Remove door retaining strap through installation opening in inner door panel
# Install in the reverse order

Torque specifications (front and rear door):
* Screw for door retaining strap on body: 14 Nm
* Bolt for door catch to inner door panel: 10 Nm

Front doors

2025-08-22T16:03:43Z

Pokseva: /* Removing and installing loudspeakers in front doors */

==Remove/install door lining on front door==


Shown on model 220 up to VIN 316716 (pre-facelift):
{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_door_lining_on_front_door.png]]
|
* 1 - Trim strip
* 2 - Covering
* 3 - Door handle cover
* 4 - Door lining
* 5 - Cover on switch group
* 6 - Screw
* 7 - Lock rosette
* 8 - Inner door panel
* 9 - Fastening clips
* 10 - Screw
* 11 - Screw
* 12 - Cover
* 13 - Screw
|}

Shown on model 220 up to VIN 316716 (pre-[[facelift]]):
{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_door_lining_on_front_door_up_to_VIN_316716.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Trim strip
* 2 - Covering
* 3 - Door handle cover
* 15 - Bolts
* 17 - Cap
|}

Shown on model 220 As of VIN 316717 ([[facelift]]):
{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_door_lining_on_front_door_as_of_VIN_316717.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Trim strip
* 2 - Covering
* 15 - Bolts
* 16 - Door opener cover
|}

Shown on model 220 up to VIN 316716 (pre-[[facelift]]):
{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_door_lining_on_front_door_up_to_VIN_316716_DCM.jpg]]
|
* 2 - Covering
* N69/1 - Left front door control unit
* N69/2 - Right front door control unit
|}

# Press trim strip (1) out of covering (2)
# Up to VIN 316716 (pre-[[facelift]]):
## Remove door handle cover (3) from door handle
## Unclip cap (17)
# As of VIN 316717 ([[facelift]]):
## Remove door opener cover (16)
# Remove screws (15)
# Press covering (2) off of door lining (2)
# Disconnect electrical connector from left front door control unit (N69/1) and right front door control unit (N69/2). For this purpose, remove covering (2).
# Unclip cover on switch group (5) with switch group from door lining (4). For this purpose, pull cover on switch group (5) downward at bottom edge until cover on switch group (5) can be removed.
# Unscrew bolt (6) from round cover plate (7). For this purpose, remove round cover plate (7).
# Unscrew bolts (10, 11) from inner door handle
# Remove screw (13). For this purpose, remove cover (12).
# Press door lining (4) off of inner door panel (8). Move mounting wedge (14) directly to fastening clips (9) and ensure that the retainer tabs on the fastening clip (9) do not tear out of the door lining (4).
# Lift door lining (4) at top on sealing rail out of retaining clips and simultaneously pull away from inner door panel (8). Installation: Remove fastening clips remaining on inner door panel (8) and install.
# Unhook Bowden cable from inside door opener
# Disconnect electrical connectors from door lining (4) and lay down door lining (4)
# Check door foil and fastening clips (9). Installation: Replace damaged door foil and fastening clips (9).
# Install in the reverse order

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=UepxCXwGitY|320|left|Front door panel removal (facelift).|frame}}
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=HTM-0lcFpMk|320|left|Front door panel removal (pre-facelift).|frame}}
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_panelling_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Front left door with panelling removed.]]
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_panelling_removed_keyless-go_antenna.jpg|thumb|none|[[KEYLESS-GO]] antenna.]]
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_wires.jpg|thumb|none|Front left door wiring.]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_panelling_inside.jpg|thumb|none|Front left door panelling inside.]]
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_panelling_inside_latch_and_handle_illumination_module.jpg|thumb|none|Latch guide and handle illumination module.]]
|}

== Removing and installing loudspeakers in front doors ==



{|
|Illustrated on model 220:
* 1 - Screws
* 2 - Paneling
* H4/1h1 - Tweeter speaker
* H4/2h1 - Tweeter speaker
* H4/1h2 - Woofer speaker
* H4/2h2 - Woofer speaker
* H4/1x1 - Left front door speaker group connector
* H4/2x1 - Right front door speaker group connector
|[[File:W220_loudspeakers_in_front_doors.jpg|500px]]
|}

Removal, installation:
# Remove door liner on front doors
# Unclip left front door speaker group connector (H4/1x1) and pull out
# Remove paneling (2) on rearview mirror triangle
# Unclip tweeter speaker (H4/1h1) from paneling
# Unscrew screws (1) on woofer speaker (H4/1h2) and remove speaker
# Install in opposite order
# Check for proper function

==Removing and installing front door lock==


{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_front_door_lock_1.png]]
|
* 1 - Bowden cable
* 2 - Locking bar
* 5 - CL cable
* 6 - Door lock
* 9 - Window lift guide rail
* 10 - Bolt
* 11 - Bolt
* Arrow - blind rivet
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_front_door_lock_2.png]]
|
* 1 - Bowden cable
* 2 - Locking bar
* 3 - Unlocking bar
* 4 - Fuse
* 6 - Door lock
* 8 - Bracket
* 11 - Screws
|}

Removing:
# Remove door liner on front door
# [[windows|Remove crank operated window]] on front door
# Unhook Bowden cable (1) for inside door opener onto door lock (6) and remove. Unclip holder (8) on lock.
# Open retainer (4) for unlocking bar (3).
# Press IRCL line (5) off door lock IRCL element
# Drill out blind rivets (arrows). Use 4.8 mm dia. drill for drilling out, taking care not to damage the inner door panel. Drive out remains of rivets with suitable drift. Remove remains of rivets and swarf from door, danger of rusting.
# Unhook window lift guide rail (9) from inner door panel and push to one side
# Unscrew lock fixing screws (11)
# Unscrew lock cover screw (10). Lock cover is permanently attached to the door lock and cannot be removed separately.
# Remove door lock (6) via access cover

Installing:
# Insert door lock (6) via access cover
# Screw in lock fixing screws (11)
# Screw in and tighten screw (10) for lock cover
# Hook window lift guide rail (9) onto inner door panel with the two mounting hooks
# Rivet window lift guide rail (9) flush with inner door panel with 4.8 mm blind rivets (arrows)
# Connect central locking line (5) to central locking element on door lock
# Close retainer (4) for unlocking bar (3). With retainer (4) open, push unlocking bar upwards until resistance can be felt. Then close retainer again
# Hang Bowden cable (1) onto door lock (6). Clip holder (8) to door lock.
# Install crank window
# Adjust crank window on front door
# Check clearance and correct if necessary
# Carry out operational check
# Fix sound deadener to inner door panel
# Install door liner on front door

* Screw on door lock: 10 Nm
* Front door test values: Clearance: 2(+-1)mm
{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=aGJW1eNvswU|320|left|Door lock actuator replacement.|frame}}
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=IF6R4MhBVsw|320|left|Door lock actuator repair.|frame}}
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_lock_removed.jpg|thumb|none|Front left door lock removed.]]
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_lock_side1.jpg|thumb|none|Front left door lock.]]
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_lock_side2.jpg|thumb|none|Front left door lock.]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_front_left_exterior_door_handle_spring_mechanism.jpg|thumb|none|Door handle spring mechanism.]]
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_unlocking_bar.jpg|thumb|none|Door unlocking bar.]]
|[[File:W220_door_unlocking_bar_connected.jpg|thumb|none|Door unlocking bar connected (front right side).]]
|}

[[File:W220_front_left_door_lock_reinstalled.jpg|thumb|none|Door lock reinstalled.]]

==Removing and installing exterior door handle on front door==

{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_exterior_door_handle_on_front_door.png]]
|
* 1 - Handle
* 2 - Lock cylinder guide
* 3 - Rotating rod
* 4 - Base
* 5 - Base
* 6 - Torx screw
* 7 - Allen screw, 6
* 8 - Hinge strap
* 9 - Screw
* 10 - Base
* 11 - Control lever
* X8/13 - Driver's door infrared receiver connector
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_exterior_door_handle_on_front_door_2.png]]
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_exterior_door_handle_on_front_door_3.png]]
|
* 2 - Lock cylinder guide
* 3 - Rotating rod
* 6 - Torx screw
* 13 - Opening for Torx screw
* 14 - Door lock
* X8/13 - Driver's door infrared receiver connector
|}

Removal:
# Remove cap from installation opening (13) narrow side of door
# Unscrew Torx screw (6). Remove Torx screw (6). Secure against falling down.
# Remove guide (2). Slightly pivot guide (2) toward rear and then pull out toward outside. Simultaneously pull out handle (1) slightly. Avoid damaging paint.
# Disconnect driver's door infrared receiver connector (X8/13)
# Remove handle (1) with bases (4) and (5). Pull handle (1) with bases (4) and (5) out of hinge strap (8) toward rear.
# Remove door liner
# Pull off insulating mat in area of door lock
# Remove hinge strap (8). First open retainer for release handle, unscrew screw (9) from handle recess and remove hinge strap (8) with release handle through installation opening in inner door panel.

Installation:
# Install hinge strap (8). Insert hinge strap (8) with release handle through installation opening in inner door panel and insert release handle into control lever retainer. Turn screw (9) into handle recess.
# Install handle (1) in hinge strap (8) together with bases (4) and (5). Ensure that the lever on the handle slides behind the actuation lever (11) on the bracket so that the lock can be unlocked.
# Insert guide (2). Simultaneously insert driver's door infrared receiver connector (X8/13). When inserting the guide (2) ensure that the rotating rod (3) is moved into the door lock (14) in the correct position.
# Tighten guide with Torx screw (6). Secure Torx screw (6) against falling down.
# Adjust clearance between handle (1) and actuation lever (12). Press release handle with retainer opened up until resistance can be felt. Then lock retainer.
# Check clearance. Pull handle (1) until resistance can be felt clearly.
# Glue on insulating mat. Replace damaged insulating mat.
# Install door liner
# Insert installation opening (13) cap into narrow side of door
# Check for proper function

* Screw for front door handle: 3 Nm
* Adjustment values for side door: Clearance: 2(+-1)mm

==Removing and installing exterior door handle on front door (KEYLESS-GO)==


{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_exterior_door_handle_on_front_door_keyless-go.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Handle
* 2 - Lock cylinder guide
* 3 - Rotating rod
* 4 - Base
* 5 - Base
* 6 - Torx screw
* 7 - Allen screw, 6
* 8 - Hinge strap
* 9 - Screw
* 10 - Base
* 11 - Control lever
* X8/13 - Driver's door infrared receiver connector
* S47x1 - Capacitive sensor and push contact connector
* S48x1 - Capacitive sensor and push contact connector
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_exterior_door_handle_on_front_door_2.png]]
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_exterior_door_handle_on_front_door_3.png]]
|
* 2 - Lock cylinder guide
* 3 - Rotating rod
* 6 - Torx screw
* 13 - Opening for Torx screw
* 14 - Door lock
* X8/13 - Driver's door infrared receiver connector
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_Removing_and_installing_exterior_door_handle_on_front_door_keyless-go_2.jpg]]
|
* X35/1 - Left door separation point
* X35/2 - Right door separation point
* S47x1 - Capacitive sensor and push contact connector
* S48x1 - Capacitive sensor and push contact connector
|}

Removal:
# Remove cap from installation opening (13) narrow side of door
# Unscrew Torx screw (6). Remove Torx screw (6). Secure against falling down.
# Remove guide (2). Slightly pivot guide (2) toward rear and then pull out toward outside. Simultaneously pull out handle (1) slightly. Avoid damaging paint.
# Disconnect driver's door infrared receiver connector (X8/13)
# Remove door liner
# Disconnect keyless go connector on hinge strap (8)
# Remove handle (1) with bases (4) and (5). Pull handle (1) with bases (4) and (5) out of hinge strap (8) toward rear.
# Pull off insulating mat in area of door lock
# Remove hinge strap (8). First open retainer for release handle, unscrew screw (9) from handle recess and remove hinge strap (8) with release handle through installation opening in inner door panel.
# Disconnect keyless go connector on inner door panel. Remove cable strap.

Installation:
# Install hinge strap (8). Insert hinge strap (8) with release handle through installation opening in inner door panel and insert release handle into control lever retainer. Turn screw (9) into handle recess.
# Contact keyless go connector on inner door panel. Replace cable strap.
# Install handle (1) in hinge strap (8) together with bases (4) and (5). Ensure that the lever on the handle slides behind the actuation lever (11) on the bracket so that the lock can be unlocked.
# Contact keyless go connector on bearing bracket (8)
# Insert guide (2). Simultaneously insert driver's door infrared receiver connector (X8/13). When inserting the guide (2) ensure that the rotating rod (3) is moved into the door lock (14) in the correct position.
# Tighten guide with Torx screw (6). Secure Torx screw (6) against falling down.
# Adjust clearance between handle (1) and actuation lever (12). Press release handle with retainer opened up until resistance can be felt. Then lock retainer.
# Check clearance. Pull handle (1) until resistance can be felt clearly.
# Glue on insulating mat. Replace damaged insulating mat.
# Install door liner
# Insert installation opening (13) cap into narrow side of door
# Check for proper function

* Screw for front door handle: 3 Nm
* Adjustment values for side door: Clearance: 2(+-1)mm

==Remove/install front door side airbag unit==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_side_airbag_unit.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Riveting
* 2 - Sidebag unit
* 3 - Retaining plate
* R12/9 - Driver sidebag squib
* R12/10 - Front passenger sidebag squib
|}

# Switch off ignition and store transmitter key outside of transmission range (min. 2 m)
# Disconnect battery ground line
# Remove door lining from left or right front doors
# Release and disconnect electrical connector from driver sidebag squib (R12/9) or from front passenger sidebag squib (R12/10)
# Drill rivets (1) out from the bracket plate (3) of the sidebag unit (2)
# Remove sidebag unit (2)
# Install in the reverse order
# Check and erase vehicle fault memory using diagnostic system (when replacing sidebag unit (2)).

{|
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_airbag_installed.jpg|thumb|none|Front left door airbag.]]
|[[File:W220_front_left_door_airbag_connected.jpg|thumb|none|Connection to airbag.]]
|}

{| class="wikitable"
! Error Code
! Generated By
! Description
|-
|9243
|AB - Airbag
|The resistance value in the ignition circuit containing component R12/10 (Front passenger side airbag ignition squib) is too high.
|}

==Remove/install front door power window switch group==

{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_door_power_window_switch_group.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Molding
* 2 - Door control module cover
* 3 - Door handle cover
* 4 - Door trim panel
* 5 - Switch group cover
* 6 - Assembly wedge
* S20/1 - Switch group for power window, driver's side
|}

# Press molding strip (1) out of door control module cover (2) on driver's door with assembly wedge (6)
# Remove door handle cover (3) from door handle in direction of arrow
# Unscrew door control module cover (2) from door liner (4) of driver's door and press off with assembly wedge (6)
# Unclip switch group cover (5) with switch group for power window, driver's side (S20/1) from door liner. For this purpose slightly press cover in at bottom edge (arrow) and lift until cover can be removed together with switch group for power window, driver's side (S20/1).
# Remove power window switch group connector, driver's side from door control module.
# Remove switch group cover (5) from power window switch group, driver's side (S20/1). For this purpose press retaining lugs (arrows) for power window switch group, driver's side (S20/1) together with suitable tool until power window switch group, driver's side (S20/1) can be removed out of switch group cover (5) toward inside. Power window switch group, driver's side (S20/1) can only be replaced completely.
# Install in the reverse order

==Remove/install front power window switches==


{|
|[[File:W220_Remove_install_front_power_window_switches.jpg]]
|
* 1 - Switch cover
* 2 - Door trim panel
* S19s1 - Right front power window switch
|}

# Unclip switch cover (1) with right front power window switch (S19s1) from door liner (2) on passenger door. For this purpose lift switch cover (1) at bottom edge (arrow) until switch cover (1) can be removed with right front power window switch (S19s1).
# Disconnect right front power window switch connector from right front power window (S19s1).
# Remove switch cover from right front power window switch (S19s1). For this purpose press retaining lugs (arrows) for right front power window switch (S19s1) together with suitable tool until right front power window switch (S19s1) can be pressed out of switch cover toward inside.
# Install in the reverse order

File:W220 loudspeakers in front doors.jpg

2025-08-22T16:02:18Z

Pokseva:

Doors

2025-08-22T15:47:55Z

Pokseva: /* Replacing door check */

== Handles ==

=== Parts ===
{|
|[[File:W220_door_handle_left_A2207601170_9999.jpg|thumb|none|Door handle (left) A2207601170 9999 (colorless - requires painting).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_prepared_for_painting.jpg|thumb|none|Door handle left ([[KEYLESS-GO]]) prepared for repainting. ]]
|}

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2207601170
|Left (front/rear)
|-
|A2207601270
|Right (front/rear)
|-
|A2207601370
|Left (front/rear). For vehicles with option code [[Option_codes#889_-_KEYLESS_-_GO|889]] ([[KEYLESS-GO]]).

|-
|A2207601470
|Right (front/rear). For vehicles with option code [[Option_codes#889_-_KEYLESS_-_GO|889]] ([[KEYLESS-GO]]).
|}

=== KEYLESS-GO ===

==== Wiring ====

KEYLESS-GO handles have wiring with 4-pin connector.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector_door_side.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector (door side)]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector_wires.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector (handle side)]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_connector.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO door handle connector pins (handle side)]]
|}

* Pin 1 - white wire
* Pin 2 - red wire
* Pin 3 - blue wire
* Pin 4 - yellow wire

The white and red wires (pin 1 and 2) are used for capacitive sensor that signals when a hand is inserted into a door handle.
The blue and yellow wires (pin 3 and 4) close circuit when the KEYLESS-GO button is pressed on a door handle.

W215 vehicles have exactly the same door handles with the only difference that [[KEYLESS-GO]] handle has the opposite connector (male instead of female) .
{|
|[[File:W215_and_W220_door_handles_left_with_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|W215 vs W220 left door handle (note the opposite connectors).]]
|}

==== Button ====
It is common that by age the KEYLESS-GO button starts malfunction or fails completely.

The correct working of KEYLESS-GO button (microswitch) can be tested by measuring the resistance between connector pins 3 and 4. When the microswitch is not pressed the resistance must be infinite. When pressed the circuit is closed resulting in < 500 Ohm resistance measurement.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_test_multimeter.jpg|thumb|none|Testing KEYLESS-GO button using multimeter]]
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=DAbFvn_emi8|320|left|Testing several KEYLESS-GO handles using multimeter|frame}}
|}

==== Button rubber ====
After years of wear the rubber on KEYLESS-GO button develops cracks and allows water to get in. The moisture in turn can lead to the damage of the button microswitch.

Aftermarket replacement rubber buttons can be bought on ebay for EUR 40 per pair. The residues of the old rubber have to be removed and the new button glued on.

Link to UK seller where you can buy 4 rubber buttons for about 29 EUR https://x8r.co.uk/mercedes.html.

PDF instruction how to change the rubber button https://www.x8r.co.uk/over/buttonsmallover/Mercedes-Benz-Keyless-Go-Entry-Door-Exterior-Handle-replacement-button-square-rubber-repair-fix-instructions-repair-video.pdf

YouTube video instruction how to change the rubber button
{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=XC5e_vI8X1M|320|left|Mercedes Keyless Go Door Handle Button Square Cover Rubber Kit Install Instructions|frame}}
|}

If the KEYLESS-GO microswitch is also damaged, the easiest solution is to buy a used handle and repaint it.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_rubber_button_off.jpg|thumb|none|Damaged KEYLESS-GO rubber button.]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_replacement_rubber_buttons_front.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO rubber buttons (front).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_replacement_rubber_buttons_back.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO rubber buttons (back).]]
|}

==== Capacitive sensor ====

It is common that by age the KEYLESS-GO capacitive sensor inside a handle starts to malfunction or fails completely.

The inside of a KEYLESS-GO door handle contains a circuit board. The space inside the handle is filled with epoxy.
The microswitch of KEYLESS-GO button seems to be connected using a type of thin ribbon cable.

{|
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_inside_monolith_wiring.jpg|thumb|none|Inside KEYLESS-GO handle monolith (wiring).]]
|[[File:W220_keyless-go_door_handle_inside_monolith_button.jpg|thumb|none|Inside KEYLESS-GO handle monolith (button).]]
|}

=== Chrome ===
With time the chrome layer of door handle develops bubbles and starts to peal off.

The chrome part is not sold separately, but can be replaced from another handle.

The chrome on KEYLESS-GO door handles can be easily removed by unscrewing two screws.

The chrome on the door handle without KEYLESS-GO button can be pulled off by carefully prying it off from the inner side of the door handle.

{|
|[[File:W220_door_handle_chrome_peals_off.jpg|thumb|none|Chrome layer peals off from the door handle.]]
|[[File:W220_door_chrome_outside_standard_and_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO (top) and standard (bottom) chrome.]]
|[[File:W220_door_chrome_inside_standard_and_keyless-go.jpg|thumb|none|KEYLESS-GO (top) and standard (bottom) chrome.]]
|}

== Driver's door lock ==
[[File:W220_drivers_door_handle_lock_dissected.jpg|thumb|none|Driver's door handle lock (dissected)]]

== Door pillar panel covers ==

{| class="wikitable"
! Part No.
! Notes
|-
|A2206900787 (~ EUR 50)
|Front left
|-
|A2206900887 (~ EUR 50)
|Front right
|-
|A2206901187 (~ EUR 50)
|Rear left
|-
|A2206901287 (~ EUR 50)
|Rear right
|}


The covers are held in place by an extremely strong tape that is already on the replacement parts. One must thoroughly clean the old tape residue off, or it will interfere with a proper mount - it can hold the new part too far out. Care must be exercised in positioning the new parts.

{|
|[[File:W220_rust_on_door_B_pillar.jpg|thumb|none|Rust on B pillar cover.]]
|[[File:W220_door_pillar_removal.jpg|thumb|none|Removal of B pillar cover.]]
|[[File:W220_door_pillar_A2206901287.jpg|thumb|none|Rear right cover trim.]]
|}

There are aftermarket carbon covers available on ebay, however, these covers come without plastic top ending.

== Inner door handle illumination ==

Inner door illumination is done by a LED module that is installed in door lining.
The LED module contains a small bulb while the light is directed to door handle over on optical wire.

{|
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module_installed.jpg|thumb|none|LED module installed]]
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module.jpg|thumb|none|LED module]]
|[[File:W220_inner_door_handle_illumination_led_module_opened.jpg|thumb|none|LED module opened]]
|}

==Door Handle Latch Mechanism==
'''Issues'''
* Inner handle is too loose and will not pull the latch mechanism far enough forward to release the latch.
* There is no tension adjustment for the cable.
* The cable slips out of the guide very easily as you move the inner door cover away from the door.
* A common fault is improper positioning of the cable in the inner handle mechanism.
'''Solution'''

At the back of the door handle mechanism there is a "Guide" - the inner part of the cable must be threaded into the guide (1 in the photo), and the cable jacket fitted into a small receptacle (at 2).

[[File:W220_Door_Handle_Latch_Mechanism.JPG|thumb|none|Door handle latch mechanism.]]

With that done, the cable is positioned properly, the tension is correct, the door handle operates the latch, and springs back to the proper position when released.



== Replacing door check ==


[[File:W220_Removing_installing_door_catch.jpg|600px]]

Removing, installing:
# Detach/attach door lining
# Pull off sound deadening mat in front area of inner door panel
# Remove screws (1) from A-pillar and B-pillar, respectively
# Remove/install door speaker (in the case of front door)
# Remove screws (2) from door. Hold door catch tight from inside for this step. Avoid damaging paint.
# Remove door retaining strap through installation opening in inner door panel
# Install in the reverse order

Torque specifications (front and rear door):
* Screw for door retaining strap on body: 14 Nm
* Bolt for door catch to inner door panel: 10 Nm

File:W220 Removing installing door catch.jpg

2025-08-22T15:45:47Z

Pokseva:

Radiator

2025-08-21T13:00:27Z

Pokseva: /* Transmission cooling hoses */ Rusted transmission cooler supply hose

==Radiator==

=== Parts ===

Radiator part number is A2205002403. MAHLE/BEHR CR304000S (180 EUR) should be OEM.

[[File:W220_radiator_A2205002403_MAHLE_CR304000S.jpg|thumb|none|MAHLE CR304000S radiator]]

A new radiator unit comes as a bare metal/plastic part.
The package includes only two replacement sealing rings (A0279971848) for coolant hoses.
This means that other radiator attachment parts must be taken from the old radiator.

In particular:
* top (A2205050186) and bottom (A2205050386) boots;
* left (A2205051188) and right (A2205051288) covers;
* 4 square nuts (A1409900052) for attaching condenser and [[engine fan]] to radiator;
* 1 square nut for attaching AC condenser line to radiator.

==== Square nuts (condenser and fan to radiator) ====

Condenser and [[engine fan]] is attached to radiator with M6 bolts that
are screwed into square (rectangular) nuts placed into radiator openings.

In total, there are 4 rectangular nuts:
* 2 nuts for attaching [[engine fan]] (installed vertically);
* and 2 nuts for attaching condenser (installed horizontally).

The part number for a single nut is A1409900052 (5 EUR).
Non-OE nuts can be purchased by searching for "Threaded plate M6, 15x10x5".

{|
|[[File:W220_radiator_square_nuts_A1409900052.jpg|thumb|none|Square nut (A1409900052)]]
|[[File:W220_radiator_square_nut_A1409900052_installed.jpg|thumb|none|Nut installed into radiator opening]]
|}

==== Square nut (AC lines to radiator) ====

AC lines are attached to radiator with a single square M6 nut 10x10x3.
[[EPC]] does not seem to have a part number for it.

{|
|[[File:W220_radiator_square_nut_AC_condenser_lines.jpg|thumb|none|Square nut (for AC lines)]]
|[[File:W220_radiator_square_nut_AC_condenser_lines_installed.jpg|thumb|none|Nut installed into radiator opening]]
|[[File:W220_radiator_AC_condenser_lines_bolt.jpg|thumb|none|AC lines attached to radiator)]]
|}

=== Remove/install radiator ===



{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_radiator.jpg|500px]]
|
* 1 - Radiator
* 2 - Coolant line (radiator-thermostat housing)
* 3 - Drain plug on radiator
* 4 - Bracket (radiator)
* 5 - Connection of automatic transmission oil line
* 6 - Connection of automatic transmission oil line
* 7 - Connection of coolant line (radiator coolant pump)
* 8 - Retaining nuts for condenser
* 9 - [[Engine fan]] shroud
* 10 - Connection for coolant line (radiator expansion reservoir)
|}

Install/remove:
# Remove lower engine compartment paneling
# Drain coolant at radiator (1). Open radiator drain plug (3).
# Disconnect automatic transmission oil lines at connection (5, 6) at radiator (1). Seal off oil lines.
# Disconnect coolant line (radiator-thermostat housing) (2) at radiator (1)
# Disconnect connection of coolant line (radiator-coolant pump) (7), connection of coolant line (radiator-expansion reservoir) (10) at radiator (1)
# Remove [[engine fan]] shroud (9)
# Detach condenser at nuts (8) at radiator
# Detach AC line at nut (arrow) at radiator
# Detach bracket of radiator (4)
# Take out radiator (1). Installation: the studs on the radiator must be located at the bottom in the rubber mounts on the crossmember.
# Install in the reverse order
# Pour in coolant
# Inspect cooling system for leaks

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3gYMXxspheU|320|center|W220 Mercedes Radiator Removal|frame}}
|}

== Transmission cooling hoses ==

[[File:W220_radiator_transmission_cooling_pipes.png|500px]]

The radiator includes a built-in transmission fluid chamber, which is used to cool the hot transmission fluid coming from the automatic transmission. The upper port on the radiator serves as the supply line (hot fluid in), while the lower port functions as the return line, sending the cooled fluid back to the transmission.

{| class="wikitable"
! Part
! Part no.
! Image
! Description
|-
|45
|A0249978182

A2209971652

A0199978382 (replaced by A2209971652)

TRUCKTEC AUTOMOTIVE 02.67.101 (10 EUR)

|[[File:W220_transmission-oil-cooler-return-hose-A0249978182.jpg|200px]]
|Transmission oil cooler return hose (bottom). From engine junction to oil cooler. (Used on 5-speed transmission only.)
|-
|40
|A2202700196
|[[File:W220_line_from_engine_junction_to_transmission_A2202700196.jpg|200px]]
|Transmission oil cooler return hose (bottom). From engine junction to transmission. (Used on 5-speed transmission only.)
|-
|40
|A2202704096
|[[File:W220_return_line_from_transmission_to_oil_cooler_A2202704096.jpg|200px]]
|Transmission oil cooler return hose (bottom). From oil cooler to transmission. (Used on 7-speed transmission only.)
|-
|910
|A2202700696 (155 EUR)
|[[File:W220_transmission-oil-cooler-supply-hose-A2202700696.jpg|200px]]
|Transmission oil cooler supply hose (top). (Used on both 5-speed and 7-speed transmissions.)
|}

=== Broken transmission cooler hose at radiator ===

The aluminum connections on a car radiator that serve as ports for the transmission fluid cooler often oxidize and become fragile over time due to a combination of chemical, environmental, and mechanical factors.

It’s not uncommon for the transmission cooler port on a radiator to weaken and break off over time, either on its own or during an attempt to remove the cooler line fitting.
When this happens, it can lead to a significant transmission fluid leak. If the hexagonal fitting (the radiator port nut) breaks off (as shown in the image below ) the internal transmission cooler (sometimes referred to as the "transmission fluid chamber" or "cooler tube") can become loose.
This may result in coolant leaking from the area between the transmission cooler tube and the main body (or tank) of the radiator.

To remove the oxidized remnants of the radiator port from the transmission cooler hose fitting, position the flat side of the fitting nut against a vise. Gently tap the top edge of the nut with a hammer, rotating the nut gradually and repeating the process around its entire circumference. This helps break down the corroded aluminum residue. Once the aluminum has been loosened sufficiently, you should be able to extract the broken port using pliers.

{|
|[[File:W220_transmission_cooler_connector_broken_on_radiator.jpg|thumb|none|Hose fitting broken off at radiator]]
|[[File:W220_radiator_broken_transmission_cooler_connector.jpg|thumb|none|Broken transmission cooler port on radiator]]
[[File:W220_extracting_radiator_remains_from_hose_connector.jpg|thumb|none|Radiator port remnants extracted from hose fitting]]
|}

=== Rusted transmission cooler supply hose ===

Transmission cooler supply line, which is attached to [[engine fan]], over years develop rust and can lead to transmission fluid leaks.

{|
|[[File:W220_rusted_transmission_cooler_supply_line.jpg|thumb|none|Rusted transmission cooler line]]
|}

The original W220 part (A2202700696) costs more than 150 EUR.
However, companies providing hoses and fittings for hydraulics (e.g., Hydroscand)
can make an aftermarket rubber hose with metal fittings for ~25 EUR.

Parts:
* Hose: 16mm 75cm 1SN 3/8"
* Fitting: male 3/8" AGM M16x1,5 (60° cone)
* Fitting: female 3/8" 90° DKM M16x1,5 (60° cone)

{|
|[[File:W220_transmission_cooler_supply_line_original_and_rubber.jpg|thumb|none|Original and rubber hoses]]
|[[File:W220_transmission_cooler_supply_line_original_and_rubber2.jpg|thumb|none|Male fitting]]
|[[File:W220_transmission_cooler_supply_line_original_and_rubber3.jpg|thumb|none|Female fitting]]
|}

{|
|[[File:W220_rubber_transmission_cooler_supply_line_installed1.jpg|thumb|none|Rubber hose attached to radiator]]
|[[File:W220_rubber_transmission_cooler_supply_line_installed2.jpg|thumb|none|Rubber hose attached to fan]]
|}

== Coolant hoses ==

[[File:S500 Hot Water Lines.JPG|thumb|none|Hot water lines on [[M113]]]]

Part numbers:
* #10 A2208321794 - Hose from engine to connecting tube
* #20 A2208320015 - Pipeline: feed thru partition panel with option 875 (heated screen washing system).
* #25 A2208320115 - Pipeline: feed thru partition panel with options 228/490/582 (auxiliary heater, elimination windshield heating, air conditioner in rear).
* #25 A2208320115 - Pipeline: feed thru partition panel.
* #30 A2208320194 - Hose from connecting tube to heat exchanger with option 228 (auxiliary heater).
* #30 A2208320194 - Hose from connecting tube to heat exchanger.
* #170 A2208320994 - Hose feed pane washer water heating.
* #170 A2208320994 - Hose feed pane washer water heating with option 582+875 (air conditioning in the rear, heated screen washing system).

=== Rusted coolant hose c-clip ===

The large coolant hoses are attached to radiator with a quickfix type c-clip.
Rust can damage the original c-clip leading to risk of hose detachment.

[[EPC]] does not have a separate part for c-clip only.
However, a compatible aftermarket 41.5mm c-clip can be purchased on eBay.

{|
|[[File:W220_coolant_hose_rusted_c-clip.jpg|thumb|none|Hose with rusted c-clip]]
|[[File:W220_coolant_hose_c-clip_41.5mm.png|thumb|none|Aftermarket 41.5mm c-clip]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W220_coolant_hose_rusted_new_c-clip.jpg|thumb|none|Rusty original and aftermarket c-clips]]
|[[File:W220_coolant_hose_c-clip_installed.jpg|thumb|none|C-clip installed on hose (in locked position)]]
|}

=== Leak in pipeline feed thru partition panel ===

A common fault with the hot water lines is a slight coolant leak caused by a small crack in the #20 or #25 Pipeline: feed thru partition panel, depending on options fitted.

The feed thru pipe is made of plastic and must get brittle with age and heat and develops a slight split or crack.

[[File:S500 Coolant Leak Engine Side.JPG|thumb|none]]

The issue can manifest itself by either, the low coolant warning light coming on, or smoke coming from the left front wheel area as the coolant sprays on the exhaust, or both. Thorough inspection of the pipe location from above with a bright flashlight will most likely show coolant leaking from the feed through pipe. Inspection from underneath the vehicle will reveal coolant baked onto the left exhaust system.

The whole replacement process can progress with no major problems, but at almost every step expect to encounter a minor issue. The method below should help overcome these irritations. STAR WIS is useless for this procedure.

Sometimes it is not necessary to drain the remaining coolant if the level has reached below the feed thru pipe. In that case there is no more leakage when the fitting is disconnected. Expect a total coolant loss from driving and repair of about 3L (3 quarts) and have some new fluid on hand before starting.

And with thanks to BenzWorld Member 'SChalmers' here is the location for the #20 and #25 Pipeline: feed thru partition panel. It seems to be the same for both RHD and LHD cars.

[[File:W220 Pipeline feed thru partition panel location.jpg|thumb|none]]

The diameter of the feed thru pipe is 20mm and some enthusiasts have fashioned a replacement using copper pipe and a 45 degree elbow.

However a genuine M-B replacement part is about US$11.

[[File:W220 Pipeline feed thru partition panel closeup.jpg|thumb|none]]

'''DIY Replacement for Pipeline feed thru partition panel:'''
The Pipeline feed thru partition panel is connected to a heater hose with a hose clamp inside the fake firewall chamber.

[[File:W220 Heater hose inside fake firewll area.JPG|thumb|none|Heater hose inside fake firewall chamber]]

'''Removal:'''
# Firstly note the position of the wiper blades. There are two marks on the front windscreen which identify the parked positions of the windscreen wiper blades. The marks are a tiny window in the black undercoating, about a 1.5mm x 10mm clear slit in the black coating. One mark is on the right side and one in the centre of the windscreen. There is no mark on the left side. The two marks can be used to reinstall the wiper mechanisms if they have been removed. Note it is obvious that the same windscreen is used for LHD and RHD vehicles, hence the marks are only really useful for LHD cars. For RHD cars the position of the right mark can be measured and transferred to the left side as a guide. If necessary (RHD cars) mark the wiper positions on masking tape on the windscreen and the plastic panel. See [https://w220.ee/Windshield_wiper#Windshield_wiper_park_position] '''TIP:''' If there is a dirt mark on the windscreen produced by the wiper blades, this will serve the same purpose.
#: [[File:W220 Windscreen Wiper Park Position Markings.JPG|thumb|none|Right side and center mark (RHD vehicle)]]
# Remove the windscreen wipers. Note the wipers may be hard to remove. A small two-arm puller had them off quickly, with no damage. When replacing them add a small bit of anti-seize grease to make it easier next time.
#: [[File:W220 Windscreen Wiper Assembly Removed.JPG|thumb|none|Windscreen Wiper Assembly Removed From Car]]
# Remove the plastic panel below the windscreen wipers. '''Note:''' Removing the Windscreen Wiper Rain Protector/Panel/Guard can be rather difficult to fully release without doing some damage as the Rain Protector/Panel/Guard is under a rubber surround on both ends. The technique is to gently pry the flange on the back of the protector out of a channel at the bottom of the windshield.
#: [[File:W220 plastic panel beneath windscreen wipers.JPG|thumb|none|Rain Protector/Panel/Guard beneath windscreen wipers (RHD car)]]
# Undo the four plastic screw/rivets.
# Carefully prise up the panel starting from the center with a wide plastic spatula type tool, levering in a direction normal or away from the glass windscreen. '''Note:''' The panel is held in place by a 6mm strip which is a friction fit into a groove in the channel at the bottom of the windscreen.
# Gingerly bend the Rain Protector/Panel/Guard up in the center enough to slip the ends out from under the rubber.
#: [[File:W220 Groove in channel for plastic panel beneath windscreen wipers.JPG|thumb|none]]
# Then on a RHD car remove the ACC air intake chamber.
#: [[File:W220 ACC air intake box.JPG|thumb|none]]
# On LHD cars you may need more room to work on the hose clamps, so disconnect the brake booster vacuum line, and remove the short piece from the booster and the bulkhead. It is also a good idea to take off the electrical harness from its clamp just over the plastic fitting.
# Open the drain valve under the radiator and catch the coolant in a clean container of at least 10L capacity. '''TIP:''' Some enthisiasts have found it is not necessary to drain the coolant as it is probably already below the level where it will spill out.
# Release the hose clamps on either side of the feed thru pipe. '''TIP:''' A pair of long pliers with bent needle-nose jaws do a good job of squeezing the hose clamps.
#: [[File:W220 Pipeline Hose Clamp Removal.JPG|thumb|none]]
#: [[File:W220 Pipeline Hose Clamp Removal 2.JPG|thumb|none]]
# Release the feed thru pipe by twisting it a few degrees clockwise looking from the front and then remove it by pulling it towards the engine bay.
#: [[File:W220 Pipeline Feed Through Pipe.JPG|thumb|none]]

'''Reinstallation:'''
Reinstallation of the replacement feed thru pipe is the reverse of the above but note these extra points.
# The Pipeline feed thru partition panel is locked into the fake firewall panel with tabs. It can be a pain to reinstall. Inserting the replacement is no problem, but it can stoutly resist rotating to the locked position so be careful to avoid breaking it. A close examination will show tiny ridges at the bottom of the slots on the locking tabs. '''TIP:''' If you are prepared to take the small risk and decide that there is no way that the fitting could ever rotate enough to be a problem with three hoses attached, then a minute or so with a small file will remove the ridges, and the fitting will turn easily to the locked position.
# Reinstallation of the Rain Protector/Panel/Guard is a real pain and is much easier done with two people. It is difficult to bend the protector under the hood to get the holes over the wiper spindles without damaging the rubber around the holes. '''TIP:''' Use a flat blade to hold up the rubber on the windshield while bending the protector enough to work its end under the rubber.
# Filter the recycled coolant into a suitable clean container and then reintroduce into the cooling system using a vacuum refiller to eliminate any trapped air. For the vacuum method see [[WIS 20.00 General|WIS 20.00 General]].

File:W220 transmission cooler supply line original and rubber3.jpg

2025-08-21T12:43:10Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 transmission cooler supply line original and rubber2.jpg

2025-08-21T12:42:58Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 transmission cooler supply line original and rubber.jpg

2025-08-21T12:42:37Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 rusted transmission cooler supply line.jpg

2025-08-21T12:42:26Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 rubber transmission cooler supply line installed2.jpg

2025-08-21T12:42:13Z

Pokseva:

File:W220 rubber transmission cooler supply line installed1.jpg

2025-08-21T12:42:00Z

Pokseva:

Radiator

2025-08-21T12:26:25Z

Pokseva: Rusted coolant hose c-clip

==Radiator==

=== Parts ===

Radiator part number is A2205002403. MAHLE/BEHR CR304000S (180 EUR) should be OEM.

[[File:W220_radiator_A2205002403_MAHLE_CR304000S.jpg|thumb|none|MAHLE CR304000S radiator]]

A new radiator unit comes as a bare metal/plastic part.
The package includes only two replacement sealing rings (A0279971848) for coolant hoses.
This means that other radiator attachment parts must be taken from the old radiator.

In particular:
* top (A2205050186) and bottom (A2205050386) boots;
* left (A2205051188) and right (A2205051288) covers;
* 4 square nuts (A1409900052) for attaching condenser and [[engine fan]] to radiator;
* 1 square nut for attaching AC condenser line to radiator.

==== Square nuts (condenser and fan to radiator) ====

Condenser and [[engine fan]] is attached to radiator with M6 bolts that
are screwed into square (rectangular) nuts placed into radiator openings.

In total, there are 4 rectangular nuts:
* 2 nuts for attaching [[engine fan]] (installed vertically);
* and 2 nuts for attaching condenser (installed horizontally).

The part number for a single nut is A1409900052 (5 EUR).
Non-OE nuts can be purchased by searching for "Threaded plate M6, 15x10x5".

{|
|[[File:W220_radiator_square_nuts_A1409900052.jpg|thumb|none|Square nut (A1409900052)]]
|[[File:W220_radiator_square_nut_A1409900052_installed.jpg|thumb|none|Nut installed into radiator opening]]
|}

==== Square nut (AC lines to radiator) ====

AC lines are attached to radiator with a single square M6 nut 10x10x3.
[[EPC]] does not seem to have a part number for it.

{|
|[[File:W220_radiator_square_nut_AC_condenser_lines.jpg|thumb|none|Square nut (for AC lines)]]
|[[File:W220_radiator_square_nut_AC_condenser_lines_installed.jpg|thumb|none|Nut installed into radiator opening]]
|[[File:W220_radiator_AC_condenser_lines_bolt.jpg|thumb|none|AC lines attached to radiator)]]
|}

=== Remove/install radiator ===



{|
|[[File:W220_remove_install_radiator.jpg|500px]]
|
* 1 - Radiator
* 2 - Coolant line (radiator-thermostat housing)
* 3 - Drain plug on radiator
* 4 - Bracket (radiator)
* 5 - Connection of automatic transmission oil line
* 6 - Connection of automatic transmission oil line
* 7 - Connection of coolant line (radiator coolant pump)
* 8 - Retaining nuts for condenser
* 9 - [[Engine fan]] shroud
* 10 - Connection for coolant line (radiator expansion reservoir)
|}

Install/remove:
# Remove lower engine compartment paneling
# Drain coolant at radiator (1). Open radiator drain plug (3).
# Disconnect automatic transmission oil lines at connection (5, 6) at radiator (1). Seal off oil lines.
# Disconnect coolant line (radiator-thermostat housing) (2) at radiator (1)
# Disconnect connection of coolant line (radiator-coolant pump) (7), connection of coolant line (radiator-expansion reservoir) (10) at radiator (1)
# Remove [[engine fan]] shroud (9)
# Detach condenser at nuts (8) at radiator
# Detach AC line at nut (arrow) at radiator
# Detach bracket of radiator (4)
# Take out radiator (1). Installation: the studs on the radiator must be located at the bottom in the rubber mounts on the crossmember.
# Install in the reverse order
# Pour in coolant
# Inspect cooling system for leaks

{|
|{{#ev:youtube|https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=3gYMXxspheU|320|center|W220 Mercedes Radiator Removal|frame}}
|}

== Transmission cooling hoses ==

[[File:W220_radiator_transmission_cooling_pipes.png|500px]]

The radiator includes a built-in transmission fluid chamber, which is used to cool the hot transmission fluid coming from the automatic transmission. The upper port on the radiator serves as the supply line (hot fluid in), while the lower port functions as the return line, sending the cooled fluid back to the transmission.

{| class="wikitable"
! Part
! Part no.
! Image
! Description
|-
|45
|A0249978182

A2209971652

A0199978382 (replaced by A2209971652)

TRUCKTEC AUTOMOTIVE 02.67.101 (10 EUR)

|[[File:W220_transmission-oil-cooler-return-hose-A0249978182.jpg|200px]]
|Transmission oil cooler return hose (bottom). From engine junction to oil cooler. (Used on 5-speed transmission only.)
|-
|40
|A2202700196
|[[File:W220_line_from_engine_junction_to_transmission_A2202700196.jpg|200px]]
|Transmission oil cooler return hose (bottom). From engine junction to transmission. (Used on 5-speed transmission only.)
|-
|40
|A2202704096
|[[File:W220_return_line_from_transmission_to_oil_cooler_A2202704096.jpg|200px]]
|Transmission oil cooler return hose (bottom). From oil cooler to transmission. (Used on 7-speed transmission only.)
|-
|910
|A2202700696 (155 EUR)
|[[File:W220_transmission-oil-cooler-supply-hose-A2202700696.jpg|200px]]
|Transmission oil cooler supply hose (top). (Used on both 5-speed and 7-speed transmissions.)
|}

=== Broken transmission cooler hose at radiator ===

The aluminum connections on a car radiator that serve as ports for the transmission fluid cooler often oxidize and become fragile over time due to a combination of chemical, environmental, and mechanical factors.

It’s not uncommon for the transmission cooler port on a radiator to weaken and break off over time, either on its own or during an attempt to remove the cooler line fitting.
When this happens, it can lead to a significant transmission fluid leak. If the hexagonal fitting (the radiator port nut) breaks off (as shown in the image below ) the internal transmission cooler (sometimes referred to as the "transmission fluid chamber" or "cooler tube") can become loose.
This may result in coolant leaking from the area between the transmission cooler tube and the main body (or tank) of the radiator.

To remove the oxidized remnants of the radiator port from the transmission cooler hose fitting, position the flat side of the fitting nut against a vise. Gently tap the top edge of the nut with a hammer, rotating the nut gradually and repeating the process around its entire circumference. This helps break down the corroded aluminum residue. Once the aluminum has been loosened sufficiently, you should be able to extract the broken port using pliers.

{|
|[[File:W220_transmission_cooler_connector_broken_on_radiator.jpg|thumb|none|Hose fitting broken off at radiator]]
|[[File:W220_radiator_broken_transmission_cooler_connector.jpg|thumb|none|Broken transmission cooler port on radiator]]
[[File:W220_extracting_radiator_remains_from_hose_connector.jpg|thumb|none|Radiator port remnants extracted from hose fitting]]
|}

== Coolant hoses ==

[[File:S500 Hot Water Lines.JPG|thumb|none|Hot water lines on [[M113]]]]

Part numbers:
* #10 A2208321794 - Hose from engine to connecting tube
* #20 A2208320015 - Pipeline: feed thru partition panel with option 875 (heated screen washing system).
* #25 A2208320115 - Pipeline: feed thru partition panel with options 228/490/582 (auxiliary heater, elimination windshield heating, air conditioner in rear).
* #25 A2208320115 - Pipeline: feed thru partition panel.
* #30 A2208320194 - Hose from connecting tube to heat exchanger with option 228 (auxiliary heater).
* #30 A2208320194 - Hose from connecting tube to heat exchanger.
* #170 A2208320994 - Hose feed pane washer water heating.
* #170 A2208320994 - Hose feed pane washer water heating with option 582+875 (air conditioning in the rear, heated screen washing system).

=== Rusted coolant hose c-clip ===

The large coolant hoses are attached to radiator with a quickfix type c-clip.
Rust can damage the original c-clip leading to risk of hose detachment.

[[EPC]] does not have a separate part for c-clip only.
However, a compatible aftermarket 41.5mm c-clip can be purchased on eBay.

{|
|[[File:W220_coolant_hose_rusted_c-clip.jpg|thumb|none|Hose with rusted c-clip]]
|[[File:W220_coolant_hose_c-clip_41.5mm.png|thumb|none|Aftermarket 41.5mm c-clip]]
|}
{|
|[[File:W220_coolant_hose_rusted_new_c-clip.jpg|thumb|none|Rusty original and aftermarket c-clips]]
|[[File:W220_coolant_hose_c-clip_installed.jpg|thumb|none|C-clip installed on hose (in locked position)]]
|}

=== Leak in pipeline feed thru partition panel ===

A common fault with the hot water lines is a slight coolant leak caused by a small crack in the #20 or #25 Pipeline: feed thru partition panel, depending on options fitted.

The feed thru pipe is made of plastic and must get brittle with age and heat and develops a slight split or crack.

[[File:S500 Coolant Leak Engine Side.JPG|thumb|none]]

The issue can manifest itself by either, the low coolant warning light coming on, or smoke coming from the left front wheel area as the coolant sprays on the exhaust, or both. Thorough inspection of the pipe location from above with a bright flashlight will most likely show coolant leaking from the feed through pipe. Inspection from underneath the vehicle will reveal coolant baked onto the left exhaust system.

The whole replacement process can progress with no major problems, but at almost every step expect to encounter a minor issue. The method below should help overcome these irritations. STAR WIS is useless for this procedure.

Sometimes it is not necessary to drain the remaining coolant if the level has reached below the feed thru pipe. In that case there is no more leakage when the fitting is disconnected. Expect a total coolant loss from driving and repair of about 3L (3 quarts) and have some new fluid on hand before starting.

And with thanks to BenzWorld Member 'SChalmers' here is the location for the #20 and #25 Pipeline: feed thru partition panel. It seems to be the same for both RHD and LHD cars.

[[File:W220 Pipeline feed thru partition panel location.jpg|thumb|none]]

The diameter of the feed thru pipe is 20mm and some enthusiasts have fashioned a replacement using copper pipe and a 45 degree elbow.

However a genuine M-B replacement part is about US$11.

[[File:W220 Pipeline feed thru partition panel closeup.jpg|thumb|none]]

'''DIY Replacement for Pipeline feed thru partition panel:'''
The Pipeline feed thru partition panel is connected to a heater hose with a hose clamp inside the fake firewall chamber.

[[File:W220 Heater hose inside fake firewll area.JPG|thumb|none|Heater hose inside fake firewall chamber]]

'''Removal:'''
# Firstly note the position of the wiper blades. There are two marks on the front windscreen which identify the parked positions of the windscreen wiper blades. The marks are a tiny window in the black undercoating, about a 1.5mm x 10mm clear slit in the black coating. One mark is on the right side and one in the centre of the windscreen. There is no mark on the left side. The two marks can be used to reinstall the wiper mechanisms if they have been removed. Note it is obvious that the same windscreen is used for LHD and RHD vehicles, hence the marks are only really useful for LHD cars. For RHD cars the position of the right mark can be measured and transferred to the left side as a guide. If necessary (RHD cars) mark the wiper positions on masking tape on the windscreen and the plastic panel. See [https://w220.ee/Windshield_wiper#Windshield_wiper_park_position] '''TIP:''' If there is a dirt mark on the windscreen produced by the wiper blades, this will serve the same purpose.
#: [[File:W220 Windscreen Wiper Park Position Markings.JPG|thumb|none|Right side and center mark (RHD vehicle)]]
# Remove the windscreen wipers. Note the wipers may be hard to remove. A small two-arm puller had them off quickly, with no damage. When replacing them add a small bit of anti-seize grease to make it easier next time.
#: [[File:W220 Windscreen Wiper Assembly Removed.JPG|thumb|none|Windscreen Wiper Assembly Removed From Car]]
# Remove the plastic panel below the windscreen wipers. '''Note:''' Removing the Windscreen Wiper Rain Protector/Panel/Guard can be rather difficult to fully release without doing some damage as the Rain Protector/Panel/Guard is under a rubber surround on both ends. The technique is to gently pry the flange on the back of the protector out of a channel at the bottom of the windshield.
#: [[File:W220 plastic panel beneath windscreen wipers.JPG|thumb|none|Rain Protector/Panel/Guard beneath windscreen wipers (RHD car)]]
# Undo the four plastic screw/rivets.
# Carefully prise up the panel starting from the center with a wide plastic spatula type tool, levering in a direction normal or away from the glass windscreen. '''Note:''' The panel is held in place by a 6mm strip which is a friction fit into a groove in the channel at the bottom of the windscreen.
# Gingerly bend the Rain Protector/Panel/Guard up in the center enough to slip the ends out from under the rubber.
#: [[File:W220 Groove in channel for plastic panel beneath windscreen wipers.JPG|thumb|none]]
# Then on a RHD car remove the ACC air intake chamber.
#: [[File:W220 ACC air intake box.JPG|thumb|none]]
# On LHD cars you may need more room to work on the hose clamps, so disconnect the brake booster vacuum line, and remove the short piece from the booster and the bulkhead. It is also a good idea to take off the electrical harness from its clamp just over the plastic fitting.
# Open the drain valve under the radiator and catch the coolant in a clean container of at least 10L capacity. '''TIP:''' Some enthisiasts have found it is not necessary to drain the coolant as it is probably already below the level where it will spill out.
# Release the hose clamps on either side of the feed thru pipe. '''TIP:''' A pair of long pliers with bent needle-nose jaws do a good job of squeezing the hose clamps.
#: [[File:W220 Pipeline Hose Clamp Removal.JPG|thumb|none]]
#: [[File:W220 Pipeline Hose Clamp Removal 2.JPG|thumb|none]]
# Release the feed thru pipe by twisting it a few degrees clockwise looking from the front and then remove it by pulling it towards the engine bay.
#: [[File:W220 Pipeline Feed Through Pipe.JPG|thumb|none]]

'''Reinstallation:'''
Reinstallation of the replacement feed thru pipe is the reverse of the above but note these extra points.
# The Pipeline feed thru partition panel is locked into the fake firewall panel with tabs. It can be a pain to reinstall. Inserting the replacement is no problem, but it can stoutly resist rotating to the locked position so be careful to avoid breaking it. A close examination will show tiny ridges at the bottom of the slots on the locking tabs. '''TIP:''' If you are prepared to take the small risk and decide that there is no way that the fitting could ever rotate enough to be a problem with three hoses attached, then a minute or so with a small file will remove the ridges, and the fitting will turn easily to the locked position.
# Reinstallation of the Rain Protector/Panel/Guard is a real pain and is much easier done with two people. It is difficult to bend the protector under the hood to get the holes over the wiper spindles without damaging the rubber around the holes. '''TIP:''' Use a flat blade to hold up the rubber on the windshield while bending the protector enough to work its end under the rubber.
# Filter the recycled coolant into a suitable clean container and then reintroduce into the cooling system using a vacuum refiller to eliminate any trapped air. For the vacuum method see [[WIS 20.00 General|WIS 20.00 General]].

File:W220 coolant hose rusted new c-clip.jpg

2025-08-21T12:11:49Z

Pokseva: